1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
190 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
195 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
217 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
221 \begin_inset Note Note
224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
225 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
226 \begin_inset Newline newline
231 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
239 \begin_layout Standard
240 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
241 LatexCommand tableofcontents
248 \begin_layout Chapter
252 \begin_layout Section
253 What is \SpecialChar LyX
257 \begin_layout Standard
259 is a document preparation system.
260 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
263 business letters and proposals,
265 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
269 It is unlike most other
270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
278 That means that when you type a section header,
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
309 takes care of the typesetting for you;
310 so you deal only with concepts,
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
320 If you haven't read it yet,
326 \begin_layout Standard
331 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
334 the format of all of the manuals.
335 If you don't read it,
336 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
337 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
340 \begin_layout Section
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 Like most applications,
348 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
349 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
350 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
353 \begin_layout Standard
354 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
355 This is not a bug or an oversight,
357 When you read a book,
358 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
359 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
360 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
365 The first case is large images.
366 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
367 left click on the image and use the option
378 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
380 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
383 \begin_layout Standard
384 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
385 menus and toolbar buttons,
386 have a look at Appendix
391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
393 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
401 \begin_layout Section
405 \begin_layout Standard
406 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
408 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
410 Just select the manual you want to read from the
417 \begin_layout Section
418 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
431 can be configured via the menu
433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
437 \begin_inset Index idx
442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
449 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
452 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 packages are available.
454 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
455 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
456 was installed on your system,
457 you might have some items that you installed locally,
459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
463 \begin_inset space \space{}
466 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
470 To force \SpecialChar LyX
471 to re-inspect your system use
473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
477 \begin_inset Index idx
482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
483 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
489 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
490 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
493 \begin_layout Section
496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
498 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
505 \begin_layout Standard
506 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
507 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
508 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
510 or print your documents
514 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
515 Some \SpecialChar LyX
516 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
525 which can produce PDFs and the like.
528 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
533 every \SpecialChar LyX
534 document can still be output as plain text
535 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
542 \begin_layout Standard
543 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
545 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
549 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
550 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
553 \begin_layout Standard
554 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
556 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
558 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
566 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
573 \begin_inset Index idx
578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
579 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
587 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
594 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 \begin_layout Chapter
599 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
603 \begin_layout Section
604 Basic File Operations
605 \begin_inset Index idx
610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
619 \begin_layout Standard
624 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
627 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
708 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
722 \begin_layout Itemize
735 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
739 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
749 \begin_layout Itemize
772 \begin_layout Itemize
785 arg "buffer-write-as"
789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
793 \begin_layout Itemize
795 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
807 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
811 \begin_layout Itemize
813 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
821 \begin_layout Itemize
835 \begin_layout Itemize
850 \begin_layout Standard
851 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
852 with a few minor differences.
855 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 command lists the available templates.
867 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
868 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
869 and possibly propose text fragments
873 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
876 you would otherwise need to
877 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
879 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
887 They can be of use for certain classes,
888 especially those for writing letters (see section
893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
895 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
902 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
903 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
906 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
914 \begin_layout Standard
915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
948 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
949 to open a file or create a new one,
951 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
956 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
973 \begin_layout Standard
995 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
997 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1000 people work on the same document at the same time.
1004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1005 If you plan to do this,
1006 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1008 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1013 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1014 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1018 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1024 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1033 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1038 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1046 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1066 will reload the document from disk.
1067 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1068 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1080 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1083 \begin_layout Section
1084 Basic Editing Features
1085 \begin_inset Index idx
1090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1099 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1106 \begin_layout Standard
1107 Like most modern word processors,
1109 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1110 can move by character,
1113 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1114 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1115 editing features and how to access them.
1116 We will start with cut and paste.
1119 \begin_layout Standard
1120 As you might expect,
1125 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1126 along with various other editing features.
1127 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1131 \begin_layout Itemize
1137 \begin_inset Index idx
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1172 \begin_layout Itemize
1178 \begin_inset Index idx
1183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1213 \begin_layout Itemize
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1250 \begin_layout Itemize
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_layout Itemize
1264 \begin_inset space ~
1270 \begin_layout Itemize
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1278 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset Index idx
1289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1298 \begin_inset Index idx
1303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1319 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1329 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1335 \begin_layout Standard
1336 The first three are self-explanatory.
1337 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1338 and other programs using
1360 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1365 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1366 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1367 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1368 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1377 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1378 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1381 \begin_layout Standard
1385 \begin_inset space ~
1390 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1391 Possible formats include HTML,
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1412 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1424 \begin_layout Standard
1428 \begin_inset space ~
1431 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1433 \begin_inset space ~
1437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1441 \begin_inset space ~
1450 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1451 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1452 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1462 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1463 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1471 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1477 \begin_inset space ~
1485 \begin_inset space ~
1488 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1491 paste from the primary selection.
1492 This is normally the currently selected text.
1495 \begin_layout Standard
1498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 \begin_inset space ~
1504 \begin_inset space ~
1512 \begin_inset space ~
1516 \begin_inset space ~
1522 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1524 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1528 Once you have found a word or expression,
1532 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1537 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1540 \begin_inset space ~
1551 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1553 \begin_inset space ~
1557 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1559 \begin_inset space ~
1567 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1581 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1585 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1589 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1594 \begin_inset space ~
1606 arg "word-find-backward"
1609 shortcut) to search backwards
1613 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1614 Even if you close the widget,
1624 arg "word-find-backward"
1627 will search further.
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1634 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1639 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1642 \begin_inset space ~
1647 field and searches the next match.
1653 \begin_inset space ~
1658 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1660 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1662 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1666 \begin_layout Standard
1668 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1670 the following options are available:
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1682 \begin_inset space ~
1688 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1691 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1692 If the toggle is set,
1694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1705 will not match the word
1706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1719 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1723 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1730 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1734 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1739 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1740 to only find complete words,
1742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1746 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1776 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1780 \begin_layout Itemize
1783 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1788 will limit search and replace,
1790 to the current cursor selection.
1793 \begin_layout Itemize
1796 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1801 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
1802 without pressing the
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1813 \begin_layout Itemize
1815 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1820 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
1821 If this is not checked,
1822 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1823 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1824 so you need to put it back manually.
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 \paragraph_spacing single
1830 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1831 The widget also has a
1835 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
1836 hiding replace and options.
1839 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1841 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1846 button brings you back to the full size.
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1850 \paragraph_spacing single
1853 also offers an advanced
1856 \begin_inset space ~
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1865 feature that is described in section
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1872 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1884 \begin_inset space \space{}
1888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1896 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1897 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1901 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1908 \begin_layout Standard
1912 arg "inset-select-all"
1915 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1916 When the cursor is inside an inset
1919 arg "inset-select-all"
1922 selects the content of the inset.
1926 arg "inset-select-all"
1929 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
1933 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1936 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
1939 \begin_layout Section
1941 \begin_inset Index idx
1946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 \begin_inset Index idx
1958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1967 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1974 \begin_layout Standard
1975 If you make a mistake,
1976 you can easily recover from it.
1978 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1981 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1984 or the toolbar button
1991 If you accidentally undo too much,
1994 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1997 or the toolbar button
2004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2011 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2015 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2018 \begin_layout Standard
2020 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2021 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2030 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2031 This is a consequence of the 100
2032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2035 step undo limit mentioned above.
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2047 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2049 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2050 but by blocks of text.
2053 \begin_layout Section
2055 \begin_inset Index idx
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2069 \begin_layout Standard
2070 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2073 \begin_layout Enumerate
2078 \begin_layout Itemize
2083 once anywhere in the edit window.
2084 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2088 \begin_layout Enumerate
2093 \begin_layout Itemize
2100 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2103 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2106 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2107 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2109 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2110 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2115 \begin_layout Itemize
2116 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2126 \begin_layout Enumerate
2134 \begin_layout Standard
2135 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2136 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2140 \begin_layout Section
2142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2144 name "sec:Navigating"
2149 \begin_inset Index idx
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Standard
2165 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2168 \begin_layout Itemize
2173 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2176 \begin_layout Itemize
2178 which is accessed either by the menu
2180 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2182 \begin_inset space ~
2187 or by the toolbar button
2190 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2196 \begin_layout Itemize
2197 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2199 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2202 and use the same menu to return to them.
2203 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2206 \begin_layout Standard
2210 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2215 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2216 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2224 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2227 \begin_layout Standard
2232 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2236 \begin_layout Subsection
2238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2240 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2245 \begin_inset Index idx
2250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2252 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2267 \begin_inset Index idx
2272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2281 \begin_layout Standard
2282 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2284 labels and cross-references (see section
2285 \begin_inset space ~
2289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2291 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2298 or citations (see section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2311 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2314 \begin_layout Standard
2315 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2316 For example with citations,
2317 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2320 \begin_layout Standard
2325 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2327 if you are displaying the list of
2329 Labels and References
2331 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2332 you can enter the text
2333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2340 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2343 \begin_layout Standard
2344 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2349 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2350 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2355 option keeps it in the current view state.
2356 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2357 \begin_inset space ~
2360 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 the subsections of sections
2366 \begin_inset space ~
2369 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2374 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2375 \begin_inset space ~
2380 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2389 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2392 \begin_layout Standard
2399 button refreshes the TOC (
2400 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2402 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2406 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2408 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2412 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2416 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2420 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2424 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2426 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2430 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2432 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2436 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2438 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2442 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2446 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2448 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2452 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2456 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2460 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2464 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2468 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2472 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2476 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2480 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2482 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2486 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2499 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2501 you can move section
2502 \begin_inset space ~
2506 \begin_inset space ~
2509 2.4 or after section
2510 \begin_inset space ~
2515 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2528 (or the corresponding key bindings
2536 ) you can change the level of sections.
2537 You can make section
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2546 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2553 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2557 \begin_layout Subsection
2558 Horizontal Scrolling
2559 \begin_inset Index idx
2564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2566 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2576 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2593 \begin_layout Standard
2595 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2596 \begin_inset space ~
2599 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2600 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2604 \begin_layout Standard
2605 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2609 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 is used on a small tablet computer
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2615 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2627 \begin_inset space ~
2640 \begin_layout Itemize
2641 Math constructs with long command names
2644 \begin_layout Standard
2645 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2646 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
2647 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2648 window so that table
2649 \begin_inset space ~
2653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2655 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2661 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
2662 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2665 \begin_layout Standard
2666 \begin_inset Float table
2673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2679 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2683 Horizontal scrolling test.
2691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2693 \begin_inset Tabular
2694 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2695 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2696 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2698 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2740 \begin_layout Section
2741 Input/Word Completion
2742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2744 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2749 \begin_inset Index idx
2754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2761 \begin_inset Index idx
2766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2797 \begin_layout Standard
2799 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2800 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2803 \begin_layout Standard
2804 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2807 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2812 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2819 \begin_inset space ~
2823 \begin_inset space ~
2828 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2832 \begin_inset space ~
2837 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2838 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2841 \begin_inset space ~
2847 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2848 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2851 \begin_layout Standard
2853 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2858 key to accept a proposed completion.
2859 If several completions are possible,
2860 a popup is opened showing them.
2861 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2862 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2866 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2873 \begin_layout Standard
2874 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2876 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2879 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2881 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2884 he special math option
2888 enables characters to be composed.
2890 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2893 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2898 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2901 you want to insert the character
2902 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2907 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2910 input the characters
2911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2923 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2925 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2929 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2931 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2936 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2938 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2941 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2943 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2945 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2948 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2953 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2955 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2959 's installation folder.
2961 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2962 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
2968 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2973 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2974 In the example above,
2980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3013 \begin_layout Section
3015 \begin_inset Index idx
3020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3027 \begin_inset Index idx
3032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3034 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3049 \begin_inset Index idx
3054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3056 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3073 \begin_layout Standard
3074 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3090 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3093 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3097 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3098 \begin_inset space ~
3102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3104 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3117 \begin_inset space ~
3126 \begin_inset space ~
3151 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3155 \begin_layout Labeling
3156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3160 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3161 LatexCommand nomenclature
3163 description "Tabulator key"
3170 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3172 If you do not understand this,
3174 \begin_inset space ~
3178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3180 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3188 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3195 \begin_inset space ~
3199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3201 reference "subsec:Lists"
3210 If you are still confused,
3216 \begin_inset Newline newline
3224 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3225 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3228 \begin_layout Labeling
3229 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3233 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3234 LatexCommand nomenclature
3236 description "Escape key"
3244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3253 to cancel operations.
3254 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3257 \begin_layout Labeling
3258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3263 These move the cursor,
3265 to the beginning and end of a line,
3266 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3269 \begin_layout Standard
3270 There are three modifier keys:
3273 \begin_layout Labeling
3274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3292 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3293 LatexCommand nomenclature
3295 description "Control key"
3300 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3304 \begin_layout Itemize
3314 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3317 \begin_layout Itemize
3327 it moves by words instead of characters.
3330 \begin_layout Itemize
3340 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3345 \begin_layout Labeling
3346 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3364 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3365 LatexCommand nomenclature
3367 description "Shift key"
3372 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3375 \begin_layout Labeling
3376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3394 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3395 LatexCommand nomenclature
3397 description "Alt or Meta key"
3402 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3403 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3404 If you have both keys,
3405 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3410 \begin_inset Newline newline
3413 This key does many different things,
3414 but it also activates the
3416 menu accelerator keys
3419 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3420 it selects that menu item.
3424 \begin_layout Standard
3427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3433 \begin_inset space ~
3437 \begin_inset space ~
3443 \begin_inset space ~
3451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3470 \begin_inset space ~
3476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3486 \begin_layout Standard
3491 manual lists all other things bound to the
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3501 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3502 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3504 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3505 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3506 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3523 followed by a capital
3530 \begin_layout Chapter
3533 \begin_inset Index idx
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3541 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3558 \begin_layout Section
3560 \begin_inset Index idx
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3584 \begin_layout Subsection
3588 \begin_layout Standard
3589 Before you do anything else,
3590 before you ever start writing a document,
3591 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3592 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3597 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3598 and format the title of your document differently.
3601 \begin_layout Standard
3606 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3607 By setting the document class,
3608 you automatically select these properties,
3609 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3610 If you don't choose a document class,
3612 picks one for you by default.
3613 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3616 \begin_layout Subsection
3618 \begin_inset Index idx
3623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3642 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3649 \begin_layout Standard
3650 You can select a class using the
3652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3653 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3657 \begin_inset Index idx
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 Select the class you want to use,
3680 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
3683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3687 \begin_layout Standard
3688 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3693 \begin_layout Description
3694 Article for basic articles
3697 \begin_layout Description
3698 Report for basic reports
3701 \begin_layout Description
3702 Book for writing a book
3705 \begin_layout Description
3706 Letter for US-style letters
3709 \begin_layout Standard
3710 There are also some non-standard classes,
3711 which \SpecialChar LyX
3712 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3714 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3715 distributions will include many of these.
3716 Here are some of the classes.
3717 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3719 Special Document Classes
3728 \begin_layout Description
3729 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3732 \begin_layout Description
3733 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
3736 \begin_layout Description
3737 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
3740 \begin_layout Description
3741 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
3742 There are three article layouts available.
3743 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
3744 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3745 All result-type statements (propositions,
3747 and so on) are sequenced together,
3750 and the like have their own sequence.
3752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3755 sequential numbering
3756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3759 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
3760 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3761 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3762 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3765 \begin_layout Description
3766 Beamer Layout for presentations
3769 \begin_layout Description
3770 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3771 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3773 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3777 \begin_layout Description
3778 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3781 \begin_layout Description
3783 \begin_inset space ~
3786 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3789 \begin_layout Description
3790 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3793 \begin_layout Description
3794 Foils Used to make transparencies
3797 \begin_layout Description
3798 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3799 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3801 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3805 \begin_layout Description
3806 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3809 \begin_layout Description
3810 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3813 \begin_layout Description
3814 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3817 \begin_layout Description
3818 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
3819 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
3820 automatic print space calculation etc.
3821 (Is used by this document.)
3824 \begin_layout Description
3825 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3828 \begin_layout Description
3829 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3832 \begin_layout Description
3837 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
3838 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
3839 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
3840 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3844 \begin_layout Description
3845 Slides Used to make transparencies
3848 \begin_layout Description
3850 \begin_inset space ~
3853 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3856 \begin_layout Description
3857 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3860 \begin_layout Standard
3861 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
3862 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3864 Special Document Classes
3872 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
3875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3879 \begin_layout Standard
3880 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3887 \begin_inset Index idx
3892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3917 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3918 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3919 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3922 \begin_layout Standard
3925 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3932 are highly specialized.
3934 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3935 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3936 with a growing number.
3937 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3938 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3939 There are just too many of them.
3940 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3943 \begin_layout Standard
3944 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3953 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3954 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3956 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3959 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 manual for information on how to install them.
3967 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3975 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3976 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3978 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3979 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3980 The \SpecialChar LyX
3981 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3984 users can write their own layout files,
3985 and many users have done so.
3988 Installing New Document Classes,
3996 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4003 name "subsec:Modules"
4008 \begin_inset Index idx
4013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4015 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4032 \begin_layout Standard
4033 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4034 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4035 This is not available in any document class,
4036 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4071 \begin_layout Standard
4072 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4075 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4076 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4077 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4078 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4079 since \SpecialChar LyX
4080 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4081 file without the missing prerequisites.
4082 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4083 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4086 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4103 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4107 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4111 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4120 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4122 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4133 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 Some modules require other modules,
4147 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4149 will advise you about these things.
4157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4161 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4166 \begin_inset Index idx
4171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4173 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4190 \begin_layout Standard
4191 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4192 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4194 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4195 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4196 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4199 a particular document has very special needs,
4200 but you need a specific inset or
4201 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4203 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4206 style only that one time.
4207 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4209 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4227 manual for information on how to use it.
4230 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4234 \begin_layout Standard
4235 Each class has a default set of options.
4236 Here's a quick table describing them:
4239 \begin_layout Standard
4240 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4248 \begin_inset Tabular
4249 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4250 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4253 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4254 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 \begin_layout Standard
4710 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4717 You're probably also wondering what
4718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4722 \begin_inset space ~
4726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4731 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4737 the rest do not and begin instead with the
4742 Some document classes,
4743 such as the ones for letters,
4744 don't use any section headings.
4765 We will describe these headings fully in section
4766 \begin_inset space ~
4770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4772 reference "subsec:Headings"
4780 \begin_layout Subsection
4782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4784 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4789 \begin_inset Index idx
4794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4796 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4811 \begin_inset Index idx
4816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4818 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4845 \begin_inset space ~
4853 \begin_inset space ~
4859 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
4860 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4861 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
4862 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4863 -class and its options,
4864 you have to read its manual.
4867 \begin_layout Standard
4869 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4873 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4877 \begin_inset space ~
4884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4890 \begin_inset space ~
4895 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4896 You can choose between the following five options:
4899 \begin_layout Labeling
4900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4905 Use default page style of current class.
4908 \begin_layout Labeling
4909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4914 No page numbers or headings.
4917 \begin_layout Labeling
4918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4926 \begin_layout Labeling
4927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4932 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4933 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4934 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
4937 \begin_layout Labeling
4938 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4943 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4949 \begin_inset Index idx
4954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4957 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 How they are defined is explained in section
4973 \begin_inset space ~
4977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4979 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4987 \begin_layout Standard
4988 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4989 \begin_inset space ~
4993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4995 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5003 \begin_layout Subsection
5004 Paper Size and Orientation
5005 \begin_inset Index idx
5010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5012 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5029 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5036 \begin_layout Standard
5037 You can find the following options in the menu
5040 \begin_inset space ~
5047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5051 \begin_inset Index idx
5056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5075 \begin_layout Labeling
5076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5080 \begin_inset space ~
5085 What size paper to print on.
5090 \begin_layout Itemize
5096 \begin_layout Itemize
5102 \begin_layout Itemize
5108 \begin_layout Itemize
5114 \begin_layout Itemize
5122 \begin_layout Itemize
5128 \begin_layout Itemize
5135 \begin_layout Labeling
5136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5141 To choose whether to output as
5152 \begin_layout Labeling
5153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5157 \begin_inset space ~
5162 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5163 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5166 \begin_layout Subsection
5168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5170 name "subsec:Margins"
5175 \begin_inset Index idx
5180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5197 \begin_inset Index idx
5202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5212 Paper margins are set in the menu
5214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5218 \begin_inset Index idx
5223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5225 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5242 \begin_layout Standard
5243 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5244 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5247 \begin_layout Subsection
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 If you change a document class,
5254 has to convert everything into the new class.
5255 That includes the paragraph environments.
5256 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5257 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5258 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5259 If this is the case,
5260 and you change the document class,
5262 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5271 The name of the style is retained,
5272 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5273 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5274 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5277 \begin_layout Section
5278 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5279 \begin_inset Index idx
5284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 \begin_layout Subsection
5305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5307 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5314 \begin_layout Standard
5315 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5316 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5319 \begin_layout Standard
5320 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5321 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5322 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5323 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5327 paragraph of a section,
5338 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5339 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5341 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5344 \begin_layout Standard
5345 The space between paragraphs,
5346 like the line spacing,
5347 the space between headings and text —
5349 all the spacing for just about everything —
5350 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5353 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5357 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5360 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5361 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5368 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5369 goes to produce a printable file.
5375 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5377 gives you the ability globally to change
5381 these pre-coded spacings.
5382 We will explain more later.
5385 \begin_layout Subsection
5386 Paragraph Separation
5387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5389 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5426 \begin_inset space ~
5434 \begin_inset space ~
5441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5452 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5470 \begin_layout Subsection
5474 \begin_layout Standard
5475 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5480 \begin_inset space ~
5485 dialog and toggle the
5488 \begin_inset space ~
5493 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5496 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5500 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5501 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5508 \begin_layout Subsection
5510 \begin_inset Index idx
5515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5517 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5534 \begin_layout Standard
5537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5541 \begin_inset Index idx
5546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5548 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5562 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5565 \begin_inset space ~
5574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5575 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5603 installed to use this feature.
5608 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5612 \begin_inset space ~
5617 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
5620 \begin_layout Section
5621 Paragraph Environments
5622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5624 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5629 \begin_inset Index idx
5634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5651 \begin_inset Index idx
5656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5657 Paragraph environments
5665 \begin_layout Subsection
5669 \begin_layout Standard
5670 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5673 \begin_layout Standard
5682 } \SpecialChar ldots
5692 \begin_inset Newline newline
5695 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5697 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5699 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
5700 we urge you to read the
5709 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5712 \begin_layout Standard
5713 A paragraph environment is simply a
5714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5721 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5722 This can include a particular style of font,
5729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5736 the different environments inside one another,
5737 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
5738 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
5739 on the fly margin adjustment,
5740 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
5741 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
5742 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5745 \begin_layout Standard
5746 To choose a new paragraph environment,
5747 use the pull-down box
5748 \begin_inset Graphics
5749 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5755 at the left end of the toolbar.
5757 will change the environment of the
5761 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5762 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
5765 \begin_layout Standard
5774 create a new paragraph using the
5778 paragraph environment.
5780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5787 because if you are in one of these environments:
5790 \begin_layout Itemize
5796 \begin_layout Itemize
5802 \begin_layout Itemize
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 \begin_layout Itemize
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 \begin_layout Standard
5834 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5839 rather than resetting it to
5844 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5845 \begin_inset space ~
5849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5851 reference "sec:Nesting"
5859 \begin_layout Subsection
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5864 The default paragraph environment is
5869 It creates a plain paragraph.
5871 resets the paragraph environment,
5872 this is the one it chooses.
5874 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
5881 \begin_layout Standard
5882 You can nest a paragraph using the
5886 environment in just about anything else,
5887 but you can't really nest anything in a
5894 \begin_layout Subsection
5896 \begin_inset Index idx
5901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5903 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5920 \begin_layout Standard
5921 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5922 title page has three parts:
5924 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
5925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5932 for thanks or contact information.
5933 For certain types of documents,
5935 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
5936 For other types of documents,
5938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5945 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5948 \begin_layout Standard
5950 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
5965 Here's how you use them:
5968 \begin_layout Itemize
5969 Put the title of your document in the
5976 \begin_layout Itemize
5977 Put the author name in the
5984 \begin_layout Itemize
5985 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
5986 want to use a fixed date,
5987 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
5988 put that text in the
5993 Note that using this environment is optional.
5994 If you don't provide any,
5996 will automatically insert today's date.
5997 If you don't want a date,
6000 Suppress default date on front page
6004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6005 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6007 \begin_inset space ~
6015 \begin_layout Standard
6016 You can use footnotes to insert
6017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6024 or contact information.
6027 \begin_layout Subsection
6029 \begin_inset Index idx
6034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6043 name "subsec:Headings"
6050 \begin_layout Standard
6051 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6053 takes care of the numbering for you.
6056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6058 \begin_inset Index idx
6063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6065 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6083 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6093 \begin_layout Enumerate
6099 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6129 \begin_layout Standard
6131 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6132 separated by periods.
6133 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6134 Unlike the other headings,
6135 parts are numbered with
6136 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6138 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6140 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6149 suppose you're writing a book.
6150 You group the book into chapters.
6152 does a similar grouping:
6155 \begin_layout Itemize
6160 is divided into either
6171 \begin_layout Itemize
6183 \begin_layout Itemize
6195 \begin_layout Itemize
6207 \begin_layout Itemize
6219 \begin_layout Itemize
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6232 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6241 Not all document types use the
6245 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6250 is the top-level heading.
6258 \begin_layout Standard
6264 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6266 labels it with its number,
6267 along with the number of the subsection,
6270 chapter that it's in.
6272 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6285 \begin_inset Index idx
6290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6309 \begin_layout Standard
6310 The unnumbered section headings have a
6311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6318 at the end of their name.
6319 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6321 \begin_inset space ~
6325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6336 Changing the Numbering
6337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6339 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6349 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6350 that's preset in the document class.
6351 Just as certain classes start with
6366 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6376 This is something you can change.
6379 \begin_layout Standard
6382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6386 \begin_inset Index idx
6391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6393 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6410 \begin_inset space ~
6414 \begin_inset space ~
6419 you will see two counters.
6424 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6425 numbers a section heading.
6426 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6430 Short Titles of Headings
6431 \begin_inset Index idx
6436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6438 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6453 \begin_inset Argument 1
6456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6465 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6472 \begin_layout Standard
6473 Some section or chapter titles,
6476 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6478 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6479 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6482 \begin_layout Standard
6484 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6485 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6486 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6487 To specify a short title,
6488 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6492 \begin_inset space ~
6498 This will insert a box labeled
6499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6510 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6511 This also works for captions inside floats.
6512 There can only be one short title per title.
6515 \begin_layout Standard
6516 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6523 \begin_layout Standard
6524 The following information applies to all section headings:
6527 \begin_layout Itemize
6528 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6531 \begin_layout Itemize
6532 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6535 \begin_layout Itemize
6536 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6539 \begin_layout Itemize
6540 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6543 \begin_layout Subsection
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6549 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6565 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6566 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6567 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6568 They also allow nesting,
6578 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6581 \begin_layout Standard
6582 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6591 when you start a new paragraph.
6593 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6597 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6600 once you are done typing in that poem,
6601 you have to change back to the
6605 environment yourself.
6608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6617 \begin_inset Index idx
6622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6631 \begin_layout Standard
6632 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
6633 it's time for the differences.
6642 are identical except for one difference:
6647 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6656 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6659 \begin_layout Standard
6660 Here's an example of the
6674 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
6675 See – no indentation!
6679 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6681 there's no indentation,
6682 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
6685 \begin_layout Standard
6686 Here's another example,
6694 \begin_layout Quotation
6701 you will see the indentation.
6702 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
6707 is the environment for you!
6713 you were quoting other text.
6716 \begin_layout Quotation
6717 Here's a new paragraph.
6718 I could ramble on and on,
6719 like a politician at election time.
6725 \begin_layout Standard
6726 As the examples show,
6731 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6732 They should put quotes in the
6737 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6741 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6746 \begin_inset Index idx
6751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6753 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6794 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
6803 \begin_inset Newline newline
6806 Which I did not rehearse!
6810 It could be much worse.
6811 This line could be long,
6814 so very long that it wraps around.
6815 It looks okay on screen,
6816 but in the printed version,
6817 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
6819 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6825 \begin_inset Newline newline
6828 And make things look fine
6829 \begin_inset Newline newline
6835 arg "newline-insert newline"
6841 \begin_layout Standard
6847 does not indent both margins.
6848 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6849 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
6853 arg "newline-insert newline"
6859 \begin_layout Subsection
6861 \begin_inset Index idx
6866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6882 \begin_layout Standard
6884 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
6895 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
6907 lets you provide your own label.
6908 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
6911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6915 \begin_layout Standard
6916 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
6919 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6928 reset the environment to
6932 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6933 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6934 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
6938 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6942 If you do this at the top level of a list,
6943 it returns you to the
6950 \begin_layout Standard
6951 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6954 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
6955 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
6956 we suggest you read all of section
6957 \begin_inset space ~
6961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6963 reference "sec:Nesting"
6971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6973 \begin_inset Index idx
6978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7004 \begin_layout Standard
7005 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7009 paragraph environment.
7010 It has the following properties:
7013 \begin_layout Itemize
7014 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7018 \begin_layout Itemize
7020 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7023 \begin_layout Itemize
7024 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7028 \begin_layout Itemize
7029 The items can have any length.
7031 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7032 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7039 \begin_layout Itemize
7044 environment inside another
7049 the label changes to a new symbol.
7053 \begin_layout Itemize
7054 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7059 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7062 \begin_layout Itemize
7064 \begin_inset space ~
7068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7070 reference "sec:Nesting"
7075 for a full explanation of nesting.
7079 \begin_layout Standard
7081 that explanation was also an example of an
7090 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7094 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7095 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7098 \begin_layout Itemize
7099 The label for the first level
7103 is a large black dot,
7108 \begin_layout Itemize
7109 The label for the second level is a dash.
7113 \begin_layout Itemize
7114 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7118 \begin_layout Itemize
7119 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7123 \begin_layout Itemize
7124 Back out to the third level.
7128 \begin_layout Itemize
7129 Back to the second level.
7133 \begin_layout Itemize
7134 Back to the outermost level.
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7138 These are the default labels for an
7143 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7148 dialog in the submenu
7153 \begin_inset Index idx
7158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7160 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7174 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7180 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7181 \begin_inset space ~
7185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7187 reference "sec:Nesting"
7195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7197 \begin_inset Index idx
7202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7204 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7221 name "sec:Enumerate"
7228 \begin_layout Standard
7233 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7234 It has these properties:
7237 \begin_layout Enumerate
7238 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7242 \begin_layout Enumerate
7243 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7247 \begin_layout Enumerate
7249 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7252 \begin_layout Enumerate
7257 environment resets the counter to one.
7260 \begin_layout Enumerate
7274 \begin_layout Enumerate
7275 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7276 Items can have any length.
7279 \begin_layout Enumerate
7280 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7283 \begin_layout Enumerate
7284 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7287 \begin_layout Enumerate
7288 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7302 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7304 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7305 labels the four different levels in an
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7313 The first level of an
7317 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7326 \begin_layout Enumerate
7327 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7331 \begin_layout Enumerate
7332 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7335 \begin_layout Enumerate
7337 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7341 \begin_layout Enumerate
7342 Back to the third level
7346 \begin_layout Enumerate
7347 Back to the second level.
7351 \begin_layout Enumerate
7352 Back to the outermost level.
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7356 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7362 \begin_inset space ~
7366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7368 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7374 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7375 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7380 There is more to nesting
7384 environments than we've stated here.
7385 You should read section
7386 \begin_inset space ~
7390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7392 reference "sec:Nesting"
7397 to learn more about nesting.
7400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7402 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7426 \begin_layout Standard
7427 Unlike the previous two environments,
7432 list has no fixed label.
7436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7443 of the first line as the label.
7447 \begin_layout Description
7449 This is an example of the
7456 \begin_layout Standard
7458 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7461 \begin_layout Standard
7463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7470 it is meant that the first usage of the
7474 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7475 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7476 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7480 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7489 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7497 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7499 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7503 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7516 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7521 for more information.) Here is an example:
7524 \begin_layout Description
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7530 This one shows how to use a
7531 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7535 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7539 \begin_inset space ~
7551 \begin_layout Description
7557 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7558 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7559 It's not a good idea to use a
7563 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7564 You're better off using
7576 paragraphs into them.
7579 \begin_layout Description
7585 environments inside one another,
7586 nest them in other types of lists,
7590 \begin_layout Standard
7591 Notice that after the first line,
7593 indents subsequent lines,
7594 offsetting them from the first line.
7597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7599 \begin_inset Index idx
7604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7606 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7628 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7629 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7633 \begin_layout Standard
7642 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
7643 Here are its properties:
7646 \begin_layout Labeling
7647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7649 \begin_inset space ~
7652 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7661 of each line as the item label.
7666 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7667 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
7669 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
7671 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
7674 space as described above.
7677 \begin_layout Labeling
7678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7679 margins As you can see,
7681 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
7682 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
7683 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
7686 \begin_layout Labeling
7687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7689 \begin_inset space ~
7692 width \SpecialChar LyX
7693 uses the width of the label,
7694 or the default width,
7696 If the label width is larger,
7698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7705 into the first line.
7707 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
7710 \begin_layout Labeling
7711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7713 \begin_inset space ~
7716 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
7720 environment has the same left margin.
7721 \begin_inset Newline newline
7724 To change the default width,
7725 select all items in the list.
7728 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7730 \begin_inset space ~
7735 dialog (toolbar button
7738 arg "layout-paragraph"
7745 \begin_inset space ~
7750 determines the default label width.
7751 You can use the text of your largest label here,
7752 but you can also use the letter
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 multiple times instead.
7761 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7771 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7774 \begin_inset space ~
7779 every time you alter a label in a
7784 \begin_inset Newline newline
7787 The predefined default width is the length of
7788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7796 \begin_inset space ~
7802 \begin_layout Standard
7807 list the same way as the
7812 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
7817 environment gives you another way to do this,
7818 using a different overall layout.
7821 \begin_layout Standard
7826 lists inside one another,
7827 nest them in other types of lists,
7829 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7837 reference "sec:Nesting"
7842 to learn about nesting.
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7846 There is yet another feature of the
7851 As you can see in the examples,
7853 left-justifies the item labels by default.
7854 You can use additional
7857 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
7862 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7863 justifies the item label.
7867 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
7869 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
7871 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
7876 are documented in section
7877 \begin_inset space ~
7881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7883 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7889 Here are some examples:
7892 \begin_layout Labeling
7893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7894 Left The default for
7901 \begin_layout Labeling
7902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7903 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7909 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
7914 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7917 \begin_layout Labeling
7918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7919 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7923 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7929 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
7934 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7937 \begin_layout Subsection
7939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7941 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7946 \begin_inset Index idx
7951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7953 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7970 \begin_layout Standard
7971 The features described in this section require that the module
7973 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7975 is loaded in the document settings.
7976 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7982 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8008 Custom Enumerate Lists
8009 \begin_inset Index idx
8014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8016 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8026 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8043 \begin_layout Standard
8045 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8050 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8051 There you add the command
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8078 \begin_inset space ~
8082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8084 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8098 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8105 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8106 For capital Roman numerals replace
8118 in the command above.
8119 For Arabic numerals use
8127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8134 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8152 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8161 You can only number 26
8162 \begin_inset space ~
8165 items with Latin letters,
8166 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8174 \begin_layout Standard
8175 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8176 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8182 \begin_layout Standard
8183 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8186 \begin_layout Enumerate
8187 \begin_inset Argument 1
8190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8216 \begin_layout Enumerate
8217 \begin_inset Argument 1
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8243 \begin_layout Enumerate
8248 \begin_layout Enumerate
8249 \begin_inset Argument 1
8252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8277 \begin_inset Argument 1
8280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8306 \begin_layout Standard
8307 For this list these commands were used:
8310 \begin_layout Standard
8321 \begin_inset Newline newline
8329 \begin_inset Newline newline
8337 \begin_inset Newline newline
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8354 makes the label emphasized and
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8373 When you change the label of a list level,
8374 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8391 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8419 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8422 \begin_layout Enumerate
8423 \begin_inset Argument 1
8426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 \begin_inset Note Note
8448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8449 goes back to default numbering
8457 \begin_layout Enumerate
8461 \begin_layout Standard
8465 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8469 \begin_layout Standard
8470 To resume an enumeration,
8477 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8478 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8479 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8486 \begin_layout Standard
8487 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8496 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8497 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8506 \begin_layout Standard
8507 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8508 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8509 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8525 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8529 \begin_layout Enumerate
8533 \begin_layout Enumerate
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8541 \begin_layout Enumerate
8542 \begin_inset Argument 1
8545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8561 This enumeration starts at 4
8564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8566 \begin_inset Index idx
8571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8573 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8590 \begin_layout Standard
8591 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8592 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8600 with standard spacing
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8604 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8605 Add there the command
8609 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8612 \begin_layout Itemize
8613 \begin_inset Argument 1
8616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Standard
8644 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8650 \begin_inset Index idx
8655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8658 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8673 For more information see its documentation,
8675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8685 \begin_layout Standard
8686 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
8687 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8691 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8694 \begin_layout Enumerate
8695 \begin_inset Argument 1
8698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8720 \begin_layout Enumerate
8721 with negative indentation
8724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8725 Further Customization
8726 \begin_inset Index idx
8731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8733 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8750 \begin_layout Standard
8751 You can also change the style of description lists.
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8761 \begin_layout Standard
8762 changes the description label font,
8766 \begin_layout Standard
8772 \begin_layout Standard
8773 sets the list style.
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8777 An example where the command
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8789 \begin_layout Standard
8793 \begin_layout Description
8795 \begin_inset space ~
8800 \begin_inset Argument 1
8803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8824 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
8825 therefore ionizing them.
8828 \begin_layout Description
8830 \begin_inset space ~
8834 In computer science,
8835 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
8837 or handles to a resource such as an object,
8839 disk space or other resource.
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8843 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8849 \begin_inset Index idx
8854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8857 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8872 For more information see its documentation
8873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8883 \begin_layout Subsection
8885 \begin_inset Index idx
8890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8901 \begin_inset space ~
8908 \begin_layout Standard
8909 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8910 has document classes for letters,
8911 we've also created two paragraph environments called
8918 \begin_inset space ~
8924 To use the letter class,
8925 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
8926 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8927 gags on the document.
8936 \begin_inset space ~
8941 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8942 You can even nest them inside other environments,
8943 though you can't nest anything in them.
8946 \begin_layout Standard
8948 you're not limited to using
8955 \begin_inset space ~
8964 \begin_inset space ~
8971 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
8974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8978 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8985 \begin_layout Standard
8990 environment formats text in the style of an address,
8991 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
8996 \begin_inset space ~
9001 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9002 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9003 Here's an example of each:
9006 \begin_layout Right Address
9008 \begin_inset Newline newline
9012 \begin_inset Newline newline
9016 \begin_inset Newline newline
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9027 \begin_inset space ~
9033 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9034 which \SpecialChar LyX
9035 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9036 Here's an example of the
9043 \begin_layout Address
9045 \begin_inset Newline newline
9048 Where do I send this
9049 \begin_inset Newline newline
9052 Your post office and country
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset space ~
9069 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9074 in either of these environments,
9076 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9091 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9100 arg "newline-insert newline"
9105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9106 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9108 \begin_inset space ~
9112 \begin_inset space ~
9117 ) to start a new line in an
9124 \begin_inset space ~
9132 \begin_layout Subsection
9136 \begin_layout Standard
9137 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9139 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9144 \begin_inset Index idx
9149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9163 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9165 you could use this environment anywhere,
9166 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9169 don't bother trying to nest
9173 in anything else or vice versa.
9179 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9180 The book document classes ignores the
9185 and it's utterly silly to use
9189 in a letter document class.
9192 \begin_layout Standard
9197 environment does several things for you.
9199 it puts the centered label
9200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9208 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9210 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9211 just as you'd expect.
9213 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9215 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9217 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9220 \begin_layout Standard
9221 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9225 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9226 The new paragraph will still be in the
9232 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9235 \begin_layout Standard
9236 \begin_inset Float figure
9243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 \begin_inset Graphics
9246 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9254 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9259 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9280 \begin_layout Standard
9281 We would love to demonstrate the
9286 but since this document is in the
9287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9296 We inserted it therefore as figure
9297 \begin_inset space ~
9301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9303 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9309 If you have never heard of an
9310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9318 you can safely ignore this environment.
9321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9323 \begin_inset Index idx
9328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9337 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9344 \begin_layout Standard
9349 environment is used to list references.
9351 you could use this environment anywhere,
9352 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9364 \begin_layout Standard
9365 When you first open a
9371 adds a large vertical space,
9372 followed by the heading
9373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9388 depending on the document class.
9389 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9390 Each paragraph of the
9394 environment is a bibliography entry.
9400 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9401 Each new paragraph is still in the
9408 \begin_layout Standard
9410 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9412 For more information on that,
9413 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9414 's bibliography handling,
9415 have a look at section
9416 \begin_inset space ~
9420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9422 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9430 \begin_layout Subsection
9431 Special Environments
9434 \begin_layout Standard
9436 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9444 \begin_inset Index idx
9449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9459 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9466 \begin_layout Standard
9472 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9474 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9479 key as a fixed whitespace.
9483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9495 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9499 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9503 \begin_inset space ~
9507 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9509 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9514 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9533 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9535 If you need to insert blank lines,
9536 you will still need to use
9539 arg "newline-insert newline"
9558 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9560 when you finish using the
9566 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9573 environment inside of others.
9576 \begin_layout Standard
9577 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9580 \begin_layout Itemize
9584 arg "newline-insert newline"
9587 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9592 \begin_inset space \space{}
9602 arg "newline-insert newline"
9608 \begin_layout Itemize
9612 arg "newline-insert newline"
9622 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9628 \begin_layout Itemize
9629 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9630 You must put at least one
9634 in any line you want blank.
9640 \begin_layout Itemize
9641 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9645 since that will insert
9650 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9653 arg "self-insert \""
9659 \begin_layout Standard
9663 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9667 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9675 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9679 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9680 printf("Hello World!
9685 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9689 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 \begin_layout Standard
9694 This is just the standard
9695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9705 \begin_layout Standard
9713 such as program source,
9714 shell scripts and so on.
9715 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
9716 \begin_inset Index idx
9721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9722 Paragraph environments
9727 For longer parts of programming code,
9728 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
9730 Program Code Listings
9735 \begin_inset space ~
9743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9747 \begin_inset Index idx
9752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9761 \begin_layout Standard
9766 environment is similar to the
9771 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
9776 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9790 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
9791 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
9793 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
9796 space) and you can have empty lines.
9810 \begin_layout Itemize
9811 have a certain language and a text style
9814 \begin_layout Itemize
9817 foot- and margin notes,
9821 index- and nomenclature entries,
9826 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
9830 \begin_layout Standard
9831 Because of these properties
9835 works like a typewriter.
9839 \begin_layout Verbatim
9843 \begin_layout Verbatim
9846 The following 2 lines are empty:
9849 \begin_layout Verbatim
9853 \begin_layout Verbatim
9857 \begin_layout Verbatim
9858 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9863 \begin_layout Standard
9868 environment is identical to
9872 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9873 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9880 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9884 \begin_layout Section
9885 Nesting Environments
9886 \begin_inset Index idx
9891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9893 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9917 \begin_layout Subsection
9921 \begin_layout Standard
9923 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
9924 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
9925 For example you have three main points in an outline,
9926 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
9928 you have a list inside of another list,
9930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9962 \begin_layout Standard
9963 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9964 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
9967 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9969 \begin_inset space ~
9973 \begin_inset space ~
9981 \begin_inset space ~
9985 \begin_inset space ~
9990 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
9991 Instead of the menu,
9992 you can also use the toolbar buttons
9995 arg "depth-increment"
10001 arg "depth-decrement"
10004 or the key bindings
10015 arg "depth-increment"
10021 arg "depth-decrement"
10025 The change will work on the current selection,
10026 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10027 or the current paragraph.
10030 \begin_layout Standard
10031 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10032 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10033 If it is invalid to do so,
10034 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10036 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10037 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10041 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10042 In \SpecialChar LyX
10044 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10045 as you're about to find out.
10046 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10049 \begin_layout Subsection
10050 What You Can and Can't Nest
10053 \begin_layout Standard
10054 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10055 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10058 \begin_layout Standard
10059 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10060 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10063 \begin_layout Itemize
10064 Completely unnestable
10067 \begin_layout Itemize
10069 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10072 \begin_layout Itemize
10074 you can nest them into other environments,
10075 but you can't nest anything into them.
10078 \begin_layout Standard
10079 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10080 and which paragraph environments have them:
10083 \begin_layout Description
10084 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10085 Can't nest into them.
10089 \begin_layout Itemize
10095 \begin_layout Itemize
10101 \begin_layout Itemize
10107 \begin_layout Itemize
10113 \begin_layout Itemize
10120 \begin_layout Description
10122 \begin_inset space ~
10125 Nestable You can nest them.
10126 You can nest other things into them.
10130 \begin_layout Itemize
10136 \begin_layout Itemize
10142 \begin_layout Itemize
10148 \begin_layout Itemize
10154 \begin_layout Itemize
10160 \begin_layout Itemize
10166 \begin_layout Itemize
10172 \begin_layout Itemize
10179 \begin_layout Itemize
10185 \begin_layout Itemize
10192 \begin_layout Description
10193 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10194 You can't nest anything into them.
10198 \begin_layout Itemize
10204 \begin_layout Itemize
10210 \begin_layout Itemize
10216 \begin_layout Itemize
10222 \begin_layout Itemize
10228 \begin_layout Itemize
10234 \begin_layout Itemize
10240 \begin_layout Itemize
10246 \begin_layout Itemize
10252 \begin_layout Itemize
10258 \begin_layout Itemize
10264 \begin_layout Itemize
10270 \begin_layout Itemize
10276 \begin_layout Itemize
10280 \begin_inset space ~
10286 \begin_layout Itemize
10293 \begin_layout Standard
10294 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10303 Although it is possible,
10305 to nest numbered section headings like
10316 \begin_inset space ~
10320 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10328 \begin_layout Subsection
10329 Nesting Other Things:
10334 \begin_inset Index idx
10339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10358 \begin_layout Standard
10359 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10360 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10364 \begin_layout Itemize
10368 \begin_layout Itemize
10372 \begin_layout Itemize
10376 \begin_layout Standard
10378 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10387 Figures and tables in
10391 are not affected by this.
10396 Have a look at section
10397 \begin_inset space ~
10401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10403 reference "sec:Floats"
10408 for more information about
10415 \begin_layout Standard
10417 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10420 or an equation is inline,
10421 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10424 \begin_layout Standard
10426 if you have an equation,
10427 figure or table in a
10428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10436 it behaves just like a
10437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10444 paragraph environment.
10445 You can nest it into any environment,
10446 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10449 \begin_layout Standard
10450 Here's an example with a table:
10453 \begin_layout Enumerate
10458 \begin_layout Enumerate
10459 This is (a) and it's nested.
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10470 \begin_layout Standard
10472 \begin_inset Tabular
10473 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10474 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10475 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10568 \begin_layout Enumerate
10570 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10574 \begin_layout Enumerate
10578 \begin_layout Standard
10579 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10580 the list would look like this:
10583 \begin_layout Enumerate
10588 \begin_layout Enumerate
10589 This is (a) and it's nested.
10593 \begin_layout Standard
10594 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10600 \begin_layout Standard
10602 \begin_inset Tabular
10603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10604 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10691 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10697 \begin_layout Enumerate
10705 it's not nested at all.
10708 \begin_layout Enumerate
10712 \begin_layout Standard
10713 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
10714 but is also the first item of a new list!
10717 \begin_layout Standard
10718 There's another trap you can fall into:
10720 but not going deep enough.
10722 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10725 \begin_layout Enumerate
10730 \begin_layout Enumerate
10731 This is (a) and it's nested.
10734 \begin_layout Standard
10735 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10741 \begin_layout Standard
10743 \begin_inset Tabular
10744 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10745 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10746 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10747 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10832 \begin_layout Standard
10833 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10839 \begin_layout Enumerate
10841 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
10849 \begin_layout Enumerate
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10855 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
10861 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10863 if you nest tables,
10864 figures or equations,
10865 make sure you go to the right depth!
10868 \begin_layout Subsection
10869 Usage and General Features
10872 \begin_layout Standard
10873 Speaking of levels,
10875 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10885 is the innermost possible depth.
10886 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10889 \begin_layout Enumerate
10890 level #1 – outermost
10894 \begin_layout Enumerate
10899 \begin_layout Enumerate
10904 \begin_layout Enumerate
10909 \begin_layout Itemize
10914 \begin_layout Itemize
10923 \begin_layout Standard
10924 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
10925 and you can see both of them in the example.
10926 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
10927 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
10937 if we tried to nest another
10942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10950 we would get errors.
10953 \begin_layout Subsection
10955 \begin_inset Index idx
10960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 \begin_layout Standard
10980 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10981 We have several examples of nested environments.
10983 we explain how we created the example,
10984 so that you can reproduce them.
10987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10989 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10992 \begin_layout Labeling
10993 \labelwidthstring MMM
10994 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11003 \begin_layout Labeling
11004 \labelwidthstring MMM
11005 #2-a This is level #2.
11006 We created it by using
11009 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11015 arg "depth-increment"
11022 \begin_layout Labeling
11023 \labelwidthstring MMM
11024 #3-a This is level #3.
11034 arg "depth-increment"
11038 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11042 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11048 arg "depth-increment"
11055 \begin_layout Standard
11062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11072 We did this by entering
11075 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11082 arg "depth-increment"
11086 then changing the paragraph environment to
11091 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11092 it also works for the
11109 \begin_layout Standard
11119 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11125 \begin_layout Labeling
11126 \labelwidthstring MMM
11127 #4-a This is level #4.
11131 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11134 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11140 we can't nest anything inside a
11145 which is why we're still at level #4.
11151 keep nesting things inside
11152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11163 \begin_layout Labeling
11164 \labelwidthstring MMM
11165 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11170 \begin_layout Labeling
11171 \labelwidthstring MMM
11172 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11173 and this is level #6.
11175 you should know how we made these two.
11179 \begin_layout Labeling
11180 \labelwidthstring MMM
11181 #5-b Back to level #5.
11185 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11191 arg "depth-decrement"
11198 \begin_layout Labeling
11199 \labelwidthstring MMM
11203 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11209 arg "depth-decrement"
11213 we're back at level #4.
11217 \begin_layout Labeling
11218 \labelwidthstring MMM
11219 #3-b Back to level #3.
11220 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11224 \begin_layout Labeling
11225 \labelwidthstring MMM
11226 #2-b Back to level #2.
11230 \begin_layout Labeling
11231 \labelwidthstring MMM
11233 back to the outermost level,
11235 After this sentence,
11240 and change the paragraph environment back to
11247 \begin_layout Standard
11248 We could have also used the
11267 environment in place of the
11272 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11280 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11281 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11286 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11296 arg "depth-increment"
11301 \begin_inset Newline newline
11305 we will change to the
11313 \begin_layout Enumerate
11322 \begin_layout Enumerate
11323 Notice how the nested
11327 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11332 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11337 We ended this example by entering
11343 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11347 and reset the nesting depth by using
11350 arg "depth-decrement"
11356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11369 \begin_inset Argument 1
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 Levels and other list environments
11383 \begin_layout Enumerate
11389 paragraph environment.
11390 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11394 \begin_layout Enumerate
11399 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11405 arg "depth-increment"
11410 what happens if we nest an
11414 environment inside of this one?
11415 It will be at level #3,
11416 but what will its label be?
11421 \begin_layout Itemize
11433 even though it's at level #3.
11435 its label is a bullet.
11436 (We got here by using
11439 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11446 arg "depth-increment"
11450 then changing the environment to
11458 \begin_layout Itemize
11463 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11470 arg "depth-increment"
11474 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11479 \begin_layout Enumerate
11481 to get to level #5.
11484 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11489 Notice the type of numbering,
11495 because we are in the
11503 environment (that is,
11519 \begin_layout Enumerate
11524 change the paragraph environment,
11525 but decrease the nesting depth?
11526 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11530 \begin_layout Enumerate
11532 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11536 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11539 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11542 \begin_layout Enumerate
11546 arg "depth-decrement"
11549 to decrease the depth after the next
11552 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11559 \begin_layout Enumerate
11561 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11566 \begin_layout Enumerate
11568 Even though we've changed levels,
11570 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11573 \begin_layout Enumerate
11575 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11587 that \SpecialChar LyX
11592 reset the counter for the label.
11596 \begin_layout Enumerate
11600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11606 arg "depth-decrement"
11610 and we're back to level #2.
11612 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11613 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
11621 \begin_layout Enumerate
11622 The same thing happens if we do another
11625 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11631 arg "depth-decrement"
11634 sequence and return to level #1,
11635 the outermost level.
11638 \begin_layout Standard
11640 we reset the environment to
11646 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
11656 The number of other
11660 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11666 The same rule applies for the
11674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11679 \begin_layout Enumerate
11680 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11681 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
11682 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
11692 \begin_layout Standard
11701 arg "depth-increment"
11710 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
11712 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11713 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11714 Either before or after this,
11715 we will put in the level.
11719 \begin_layout Enumerate
11726 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11730 \begin_layout Verse
11731 Now we will add verse.
11732 \begin_inset Newline newline
11735 It will get much worse.
11736 \begin_inset Newline newline
11747 arg "depth-increment"
11759 \begin_layout Verse
11762 \begin_inset Newline newline
11765 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11766 \begin_inset Newline newline
11772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11780 \begin_layout Verse
11781 Here comes a table:
11785 \begin_layout Standard
11786 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11792 \begin_layout Standard
11794 \begin_inset Tabular
11795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11796 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11883 \begin_layout Verse
11887 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11899 arg "depth-increment"
11906 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11913 \begin_inset Newline newline
11921 arg "depth-decrement"
11928 \begin_layout Enumerate
11935 level #1) This is another item.
11936 Note that selecting a
11940 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11941 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11948 \begin_layout Quotation
11949 We're now ending the
11953 list and changing to
11958 We're still at level #1.
11959 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11960 The next set of paragraphs is a
11961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11968 We will nest both the
11975 \begin_inset space ~
11980 environments inside of this one,
11981 then use another nested
11985 for the letter body.
11989 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11992 to preserve the depth.
11993 Remember that you need to use
11996 arg "newline-insert newline"
11999 to create multiple lines inside the
12006 \begin_inset space ~
12016 \begin_layout Right Address
12018 \begin_inset Newline newline
12023 \begin_inset Newline newline
12029 \begin_layout Address
12031 \begin_inset space ~
12037 \begin_layout Quotation
12038 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12042 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12044 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12045 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12046 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12048 we thank you for your patience.
12051 \begin_layout Quotation
12054 now have a special on beef.
12055 If you are interested,
12056 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12057 along with payment.
12060 \begin_layout Quotation
12061 We thank you again for your patience.
12064 \begin_layout Address
12066 \begin_inset Newline newline
12073 \begin_layout Quotation
12074 That ends that example!
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12079 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12080 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12081 We could have easily nested an
12103 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12106 \begin_layout Subsection
12108 \begin_inset Index idx
12113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12115 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12132 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12141 For example you need two different enumerations:
12144 \begin_layout Enumerate
12149 \begin_layout Enumerate
12154 \begin_layout Enumerate
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 \begin_inset Separator plain
12165 \begin_layout Itemize
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12178 \begin_layout Enumerate
12182 \begin_layout Enumerate
12186 \begin_layout Enumerate
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 To split an existing list into two lists,
12192 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 Separated <Name> Above
12199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12200 Separated <Name> Below
12203 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12204 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12205 Inside nested environments,
12206 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12210 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12211 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12214 \begin_layout Standard
12216 you get an environment separator when you press
12219 arg "paragraph-break"
12226 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12229 \begin_layout Section
12231 Pagination and Line Breaks
12232 \begin_inset Index idx
12237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12246 \begin_layout Standard
12248 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12250 offers you more spaces:
12251 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12252 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12255 \begin_layout Subsection
12257 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12259 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12265 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12270 \begin_inset Index idx
12275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12282 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12284 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12302 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12304 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12308 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12309 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12311 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12314 break the line at that point.
12315 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12319 \begin_layout Quote
12320 Further documentation is given in section
12321 \begin_inset Newline newline
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12335 \begin_layout Standard
12337 it would be a good thing to put a
12338 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12340 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12358 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12369 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12371 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12377 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12379 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12381 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12385 \begin_inset space ~
12393 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12399 \begin_layout Subsection
12401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12403 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12408 \begin_inset Index idx
12413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12440 The length units are listed in Appendix
12441 \begin_inset space ~
12445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12447 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12457 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12459 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12463 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12467 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12472 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12476 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12483 \begin_inset Index idx
12488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12490 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12497 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12513 \begin_layout Standard
12514 With the introduction of typewriters,
12515 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12516 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12517 automatically takes care about this.
12519 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12521 \begin_inset space ~
12525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12527 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12533 To insert a normal space,
12536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12537 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12539 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12541 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12553 arg "space-insert normal"
12559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12561 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12567 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12572 \begin_inset Index idx
12577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12602 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12609 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12614 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
12616 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
12620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12624 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
12626 inside abbreviations:
12629 \begin_layout Quote
12631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12635 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12638 \begin_layout Standard
12639 or between values and units.
12640 Compare for example this:
12641 \begin_inset Newline newline
12645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12649 \begin_inset Newline newline
12652 10 kg (normal space
12653 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12665 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12673 \begin_inset space ~
12681 arg "space-insert thin"
12687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12691 \begin_layout Standard
12692 You can also insert the following space types:
12695 \begin_layout Description
12697 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
12699 \begin_inset space ~
12705 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12709 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12713 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12717 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
12719 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
12722 space between the arrows.
12723 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
12727 \begin_layout Description
12729 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
12731 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
12735 \begin_inset space ~
12738 space A line with a
12739 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12743 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12747 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12751 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
12753 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
12756 space between the arrows.
12759 \begin_layout Description
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12765 \begin_inset space ~
12768 space A line with a
12769 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12773 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12777 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12780 negative thin space between the arrows.
12783 \begin_layout Description
12785 \begin_inset space ~
12789 \begin_inset space ~
12792 space A line with a
12793 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12797 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12801 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12804 negative medium space between the arrows.
12807 \begin_layout Description
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12816 space A line with a
12817 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12821 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12825 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12828 negative thick space between the arrows.
12831 \begin_layout Description
12833 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
12835 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
12837 \begin_inset space ~
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12851 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12855 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12859 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12863 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
12865 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
12867 \begin_inset space ~
12873 \begin_inset space ~
12877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12880 em) space between the arrows.
12883 \begin_layout Description
12885 \begin_inset space ~
12889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12897 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12905 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
12907 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
12911 \begin_inset space ~
12915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12918 em) space between the arrows.
12921 \begin_layout Description
12923 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
12925 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
12927 \begin_inset space ~
12933 \begin_inset space ~
12937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12945 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12953 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
12955 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12961 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12972 em) space between the arrows.
12975 \begin_layout Description
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12981 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12985 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12990 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12997 cm space between the arrows.
13000 \begin_layout Standard
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13008 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13013 lists the different space sizes.
13016 \begin_layout Standard
13017 \begin_inset Float table
13024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13025 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13030 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13034 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 \begin_inset Tabular
13045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13046 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13047 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13048 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13103 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13105 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13106 Non-breaking Normal
13113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13146 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13148 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13163 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13169 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13180 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13191 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13197 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13208 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13234 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13240 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13265 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13280 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13309 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13311 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13315 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13317 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13334 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13336 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13344 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13346 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13362 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13395 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13397 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13437 \begin_inset Index idx
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13444 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13461 \begin_layout Standard
13462 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13463 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13465 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13468 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13469 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13470 If there is more than one H
13471 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13475 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13478 \begin_layout Standard
13479 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13482 \begin_layout Quote
13484 This is on the left side
13485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13488 This is on the right
13491 \begin_layout Quote
13494 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13498 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13504 \begin_layout Quote
13507 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13511 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13521 \begin_layout Standard
13522 That was an example in the
13528 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13536 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13539 is one in a standard paragraph.
13540 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13545 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13548 \begin_layout Standard
13550 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13552 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13555 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13558 \begin_inset space ~
13563 s in the space dialog:
13564 The following patterns are available:
13567 \begin_layout Standard
13570 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13574 \begin_inset space ~
13580 \begin_layout Standard
13583 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13587 \begin_inset space ~
13593 \begin_layout Standard
13596 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13606 \begin_layout Standard
13609 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13619 \begin_layout Standard
13621 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
13623 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
13627 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
13628 (= opened downwards)
13632 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13636 \begin_inset space ~
13642 \begin_layout Standard
13644 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
13646 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
13650 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
13655 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13659 \begin_inset space ~
13665 \begin_layout Standard
13666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
13678 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
13681 is at the beginning of a line,
13686 in the first line in a paragraph,
13690 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
13692 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
13695 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13696 If you need space in this case anyway,
13698 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
13702 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
13707 option in the space dialog.
13715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13719 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13724 \begin_inset Index idx
13729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13731 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13748 \begin_layout Standard
13749 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13751 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13754 \begin_layout Standard
13755 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13758 What is correct English?:
13759 \begin_inset Newline newline
13763 \begin_inset Newline newline
13767 \begin_inset space ~
13770 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13771 \begin_inset Newline newline
13775 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13786 \begin_inset Newline newline
13790 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13801 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13807 \begin_layout Standard
13809 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13814 \begin_inset space ~
13818 \begin_inset space ~
13822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13827 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13830 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13834 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
13835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13839 \begin_inset space ~
13843 \begin_inset space ~
13847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13850 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13859 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13860 That is why it is named
13861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13869 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13870 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
13873 \begin_layout Subsection
13875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13877 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13882 \begin_inset Index idx
13887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13889 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13907 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
13910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 \begin_inset space ~
13919 There you find the following sizes:
13922 \begin_layout Standard
13926 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
13935 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
13943 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
13948 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13949 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13953 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
13958 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13961 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13963 \begin_inset space ~
13969 \begin_inset Index idx
13974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13990 for the paragraph separation.
13991 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13994 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14002 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14008 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14012 \begin_layout Standard
14014 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14023 equal to the height,
14024 or half the height,
14025 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14030 \begin_layout Standard
14034 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14040 \begin_inset Index idx
14045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14061 is a variable space,
14062 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14064 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14069 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14070 because the space between them is then maximal.
14074 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14082 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14088 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14096 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14101 s are described in section
14102 \begin_inset space ~
14106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14108 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14118 If there are several
14121 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14127 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14128 You can therefore use
14131 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14136 s to center text on a page,
14137 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14140 \begin_layout Standard
14145 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14152 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14160 \begin_layout Standard
14161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14172 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14173 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14185 \begin_layout Subsection
14186 Paragraph Alignment
14187 \begin_inset Index idx
14192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14194 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14211 \begin_layout Standard
14212 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14217 dialog (toolbar button
14220 arg "layout-paragraph"
14224 There are five possibilities:
14227 \begin_layout Itemize
14235 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14241 \begin_layout Itemize
14249 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14255 \begin_layout Itemize
14263 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14269 \begin_layout Itemize
14277 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14283 \begin_layout Itemize
14291 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14297 \begin_layout Standard
14298 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14299 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14300 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14301 and look like this:
14304 \begin_layout Standard
14306 This paragraph is right aligned,
14309 \begin_layout Standard
14311 this one is centered,
14314 \begin_layout Standard
14316 this one is left aligned.
14319 \begin_layout Subsection
14321 \begin_inset Index idx
14326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14328 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14345 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14352 \begin_layout Standard
14353 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14354 does the page breaks in your document,
14355 you can force a page break where you want one.
14356 Normally this will not be necessary,
14357 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14358 is good at page breaking.
14359 Only if you use a lot of
14365 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14368 \begin_layout Standard
14369 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14373 have to change the page breaking.
14376 \begin_layout Standard
14377 There are two types of page breaks:
14378 One that ends the page without any special action.
14379 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14382 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14384 \begin_inset space ~
14391 that is inserted via the menu
14393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14394 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14396 \begin_inset space ~
14402 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14403 so that it fills out the complete page.
14404 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14407 \begin_layout Standard
14408 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14411 the wrong way to do it.
14413 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14414 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14418 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14423 to learn more about
14430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14434 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14439 \begin_inset Index idx
14444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14463 \begin_layout Standard
14464 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14465 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14466 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14467 including unprocessed floats,
14468 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14469 if necessary by adding pages.
14472 \begin_layout Standard
14473 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14476 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14478 \begin_inset space ~
14484 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14485 you can use the menu
14487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14488 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14490 \begin_inset space ~
14494 \begin_inset space ~
14499 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14500 if necessary by adding a page.
14501 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14507 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14508 Suppressing Page Breaks
14511 \begin_inset Index idx
14516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14518 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14522 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14537 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14541 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14546 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14550 \begin_layout Standard
14552 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14553 To discourage page break at
14554 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14556 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14557 certain point you can use
14561 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14563 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14566 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14568 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14575 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14576 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14581 \begin_layout Subsection
14583 \begin_inset Index idx
14588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14597 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14604 \begin_layout Standard
14605 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14606 one simply breaks the line.
14607 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14610 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14616 \begin_inset space ~
14624 arg "newline-insert newline"
14628 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14631 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14633 \begin_inset space ~
14637 \begin_inset space ~
14645 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14648 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
14649 This is useful to avoid
14650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14657 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14660 \begin_layout Standard
14661 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14663 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14664 is very good at line breaking.
14667 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
14669 in a poem or for an address (see sections
14670 \begin_inset space ~
14674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14676 reference "sec:Quote"
14683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14685 reference "sec:Verse"
14691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14693 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14701 \begin_layout Subsection
14703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14705 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14710 \begin_inset Index idx
14715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14724 \begin_layout Standard
14726 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14737 \begin_layout Standard
14741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14742 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14749 you can insert horizontal lines.
14750 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
14751 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14754 \begin_layout Standard
14756 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14767 \begin_layout Section
14768 Characters and Symbols
14771 \begin_layout Standard
14772 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14773 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
14775 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14783 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14788 for information on how this is done.
14791 \begin_layout Standard
14792 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
14797 dialog via the menu
14799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14800 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14806 \begin_layout Standard
14807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14816 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14818 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14826 \begin_layout Section
14827 Fonts and Text Styles
14828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14830 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14837 \begin_layout Subsection
14839 \begin_inset Index idx
14844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14863 \begin_layout Standard
14864 There are two types of fonts:
14867 \begin_layout Description
14869 \begin_inset space ~
14873 \begin_inset Index idx
14878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14880 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14894 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14899 characters) in the font.
14900 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14901 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14902 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14903 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14904 \begin_inset Newline newline
14907 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14908 But to achieve a better quality,
14909 many fonts define several font sizes.
14910 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
14911 \begin_inset Newline newline
14927 \begin_inset space ~
14935 \begin_layout Description
14937 \begin_inset space ~
14941 \begin_inset Index idx
14946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14963 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
14964 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14966 they don't scale well,
14967 because in order to scale a glyph,
14968 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14969 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
14970 In order to mitigate this effect,
14971 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14972 \begin_inset space ~
14975 pixels high up to 34
14976 \begin_inset space ~
14979 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14980 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
14981 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
14982 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14987 Bitmap fonts are named
14990 \begin_inset space ~
14995 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14998 \begin_layout Standard
14999 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15000 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15001 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15002 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15005 \begin_layout Standard
15006 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15007 look at its document properties.
15010 \begin_layout Standard
15011 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15012 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15014 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15017 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15019 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15020 to emphasize text you use an
15021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15031 In \SpecialChar LyX
15033 you do things based on contexts,
15034 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15037 \begin_layout Subsection
15040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15042 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15049 \begin_layout Standard
15052 used its own fonts.
15054 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15055 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15057 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15058 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15059 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15060 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15061 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15062 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15063 files are very portable across different machines.
15065 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15066 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15067 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15069 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15070 \begin_inset space ~
15074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15076 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15082 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15083 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15086 \begin_layout Standard
15087 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15088 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15089 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15090 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15092 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15095 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15096 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15099 \begin_layout Standard
15100 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15110 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15112 or other font deficiencies;
15113 so you might have to experiment.
15121 \begin_layout Subsection
15122 Document Font and Font size
15123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15125 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15130 \begin_inset Index idx
15135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15137 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15152 \begin_inset Index idx
15157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15159 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15176 \begin_layout Standard
15177 You can set the document fonts in the
15179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15183 \begin_inset Index idx
15188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15190 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15209 section of the dialog,
15210 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15215 \begin_inset space ~
15225 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15229 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15232 \begin_layout Standard
15238 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15239 This requires that you use
15252 as the output format,
15254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15258 \begin_inset space \space{}
15261 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15262 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15263 installed (see section
15264 \begin_inset space ~
15268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15270 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15276 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15278 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15279 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15281 \begin_inset space ~
15286 since \SpecialChar LyX
15287 cannot determine the family.
15288 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15289 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15292 cannot determine this in advance,
15293 so you might need to experiment.
15296 \begin_layout Standard
15297 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15298 fonts (which is the default),
15299 the possible options for the font include
15303 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15310 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15312 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15314 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15319 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15321 depending on the document language,
15325 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15326 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15334 \begin_inset space ~
15340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15350 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15351 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15373 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15395 European Computer Modern
15398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 some classes set different default fonts.
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15416 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15417 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15422 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15425 \begin_inset space ~
15430 version 6 or later,
15431 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15436 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15437 you have to use a vector font.
15438 Depending on how your document should look,
15442 \begin_layout Itemize
15446 \begin_inset space ~
15452 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15464 \begin_inset space ~
15469 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15470 community in order to replace
15474 as the default font.
15475 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15476 Except for some details,
15477 where the appearance was improved,
15481 \begin_inset space ~
15494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15495 One difference is improved kerning.
15503 \begin_layout Itemize
15504 If you do not like the look of
15513 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15519 \begin_inset space ~
15525 \begin_inset space ~
15535 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15536 \begin_inset space ~
15539 serif and typewriter fonts,
15543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15552 \begin_inset space ~
15561 for sans serif text),
15562 or different shapes of the same font,
15564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15568 \begin_inset space \space{}
15576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15580 \begin_inset space \space{}
15586 \begin_inset space ~
15594 \begin_inset space ~
15604 but you can also select your own.
15605 \begin_inset Newline newline
15608 The differences between roman,
15612 \begin_inset space ~
15621 fonts are explained in section
15622 \begin_inset space ~
15626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15628 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15634 \begin_inset Newline newline
15640 \begin_inset space ~
15645 was originally designed for newspapers.
15646 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
15650 \begin_inset space ~
15655 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15658 \begin_layout Standard
15659 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15675 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15680 depends on the class you are using.
15681 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15684 \begin_layout Standard
15685 Note that the font size is the
15690 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15691 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
15693 and subscripts) by this value.
15694 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15697 \begin_inset space ~
15703 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15704 \begin_inset space ~
15708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15710 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15722 \begin_inset space ~
15727 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
15729 \begin_inset space ~
15732 serif or typewriter.
15737 selection uses what is preset by the class,
15738 the other selections override this.
15749 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15752 \begin_layout Standard
15757 LaTeX font encoding
15759 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15765 \begin_inset Index idx
15770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15773 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15788 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
15790 \begin_inset space ~
15794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15796 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
15805 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15806 Unless you have specific reasons,
15808 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
15812 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
15820 \begin_layout Standard
15824 Use Old Style Figures
15828 Use True Small Caps
15831 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15834 Use Old Style Figures
15837 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
15838 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15846 9) with ascenders and descenders,
15847 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
15850 Use True Small Caps
15852 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
15853 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
15854 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15855 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
15859 \begin_layout Standard
15861 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
15864 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
15869 if you use non-TeX fonts),
15875 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15881 \begin_layout Standard
15886 allows users of the languages Chinese,
15888 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
15892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15893 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15899 \begin_inset Index idx
15904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15907 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15921 So this has no effect for the document language
15937 \begin_layout Standard
15940 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15942 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15948 \begin_inset Index idx
15953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15974 \begin_layout Standard
15977 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15979 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15984 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15986 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15992 instead of ligatures (--,
15994 \begin_inset space ~
15998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16000 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16011 \begin_layout Standard
16012 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16025 When you choose a new font or font size,
16031 change the screen font!
16032 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16033 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16035 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16037 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16042 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16048 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16061 \begin_layout Subsection
16065 \begin_layout Standard
16066 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16067 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16068 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16069 fonts for your document,
16070 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16072 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16076 \begin_inset Index idx
16081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16098 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16099 automatically selects a math font.
16100 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16101 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16102 's default font family
16103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16109 \begin_inset space ~
16115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16120 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16123 \begin_layout Standard
16124 Note that the math font will not be used for
16128 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16134 or by the insertion of the command
16141 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16142 \begin_inset space ~
16146 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16148 \begin_inset space ~
16151 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16154 \begin_inset space ~
16162 \begin_inset space ~
16167 in the document font settings.
16170 \begin_layout Standard
16171 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16172 fonts for the document,
16173 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16174 font (in most cases
16175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16181 \begin_inset space ~
16187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16190 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16191 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16198 \begin_inset space ~
16204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16210 \begin_layout Subsection
16212 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16222 name "subsec:charstyles"
16229 \begin_inset Index idx
16234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16241 \begin_inset Index idx
16246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16255 \begin_layout Standard
16256 As we've already seen,
16258 automatically changes the
16259 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16262 style for certain paragraph environments.
16264 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16266 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16267 This is where we meet the concept of
16273 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16279 \begin_layout Standard
16281 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16287 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16314 available with all document classes.
16316 some document classes and modules provide
16320 for specific purposes.
16321 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16324 \begin_layout Standard
16326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16329 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16338 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16343 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16344 you selected it and chose e.
16345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 encourage the use of
16378 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16380 \begin_inset space ~
16384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16386 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16392 Rather than fiddling with
16397 they encourage the use of
16402 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16408 \begin_inset Quotes els
16412 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16417 \begin_inset Quotes els
16421 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16425 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16427 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16428 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16429 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16430 On a more practical level,
16431 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16432 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16437 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16444 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16445 With a semantic markup (such as
16451 you'd just need to change the definition of
16456 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16459 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16460 using different markup semantics.
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16465 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16467 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16476 Builtin Text Styles
16477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16479 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16486 \begin_layout Standard
16488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16489 The two builtin text styles can be
16490 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16494 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16498 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16499 both of these styles
16502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16506 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16508 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16510 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16517 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16525 \begin_layout Standard
16531 do one of the following:
16534 \begin_layout Itemize
16535 click on the toolbar button
16544 \begin_layout Itemize
16545 use the key binding
16552 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16556 \begin_layout Itemize
16558 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16562 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16564 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16574 arg "dialog-show character"
16578 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16582 arg "dialog-show character"
16586 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16587 as described in section
16588 \begin_inset space ~
16592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16594 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16600 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
16610 \begin_layout Standard
16612 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
16614 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
16618 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
16622 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
16624 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
16628 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
16637 style is already active,
16638 they deactivate it.
16641 \begin_layout Standard
16642 One typically uses the
16646 style for proper names.
16649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16656 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
16658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
16666 \begin_layout Standard
16668 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
16674 is producing text in
16679 but the definition can be changed.
16684 \begin_layout Standard
16686 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
16688 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
16696 You can activate (or deactivate —
16697 it's also a toggle) the
16704 \begin_layout Itemize
16705 clicking on the toolbar button
16714 \begin_layout Itemize
16715 using the keybindings
16722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
16726 \begin_layout Itemize
16728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16732 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
16734 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
16736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16744 arg "dialog-show character"
16748 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16752 arg "dialog-show character"
16756 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
16757 as described in section
16758 \begin_inset space ~
16762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16764 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16770 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
16780 \begin_layout Standard
16785 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16787 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
16789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
16792 packages use a different font
16793 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
16795 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16801 \begin_layout Standard
16802 We've been using the
16806 style all over the place in this document.
16807 Here's one more example:
16810 \begin_layout Quotation
16814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
16816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
16822 \begin_layout Standard
16823 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16824 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16825 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
16826 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
16827 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
16829 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
16834 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
16836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
16840 \begin_layout Standard
16842 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
16843 In contrast to the custom text styles,
16844 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
16852 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
16855 always reset to the default font using the key binding
16862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
16864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
16868 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
16871 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16873 \begin_inset space ~
16876 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16888 arg "dialog-show character"
16894 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
16902 arg "dialog-show character"
16906 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16910 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
16914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16916 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16923 \begin_layout Standard
16925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
16926 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
16927 a module (see section
16928 \begin_inset space ~
16932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16934 reference "subsec:Modules"
16943 or local layout settings (see section
16944 \begin_inset space ~
16948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16950 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16956 As the two builtin styles,
16961 markup for specific functions.
16968 module that provides,
16969 among other things,
16970 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
16982 \begin_inset Quotes els
16986 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16992 \begin_layout Standard
16994 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
16995 These styles can be found,
16999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17001 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17003 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17009 \begin_layout Standard
17011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17012 For the purpose of demonstration,
17013 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17017 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17018 By example of the emphasized style,
17019 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17024 appears as normal font change,
17025 the custom text style
17026 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17031 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17039 appears as an inset,
17040 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17041 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17043 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17045 \begin_inset Flex Code
17048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17060 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17075 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17089 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17094 \begin_layout Subsection
17096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17102 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17108 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17110 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17116 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17124 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17129 \begin_inset Index idx
17134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17143 \begin_layout Standard
17144 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17149 so \SpecialChar LyX
17151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17157 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17158 the properties of text passages
17159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17164 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17166 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17167 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17174 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17176 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17177 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17182 comes in as a last resort.
17187 \begin_layout Standard
17188 Before we document how to
17189 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17190 use custom character style
17191 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17192 tweak the text properties
17195 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17197 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17204 \begin_inset Newline newline
17207 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17210 \begin_layout Standard
17212 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17213 use custom character styles
17214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17215 tweak text properties
17219 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17222 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17227 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17235 arg "dialog-show character"
17238 dialog or press the toolbar button
17241 arg "dialog-show character"
17246 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17249 boxes in this dialog,
17250 each corresponding to a different
17251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17256 property that you can choose.
17257 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17261 \begin_inset space ~
17267 which keeps the current state of that property.
17269 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17273 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17275 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17280 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17281 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17284 \begin_layout Standard
17286 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17288 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17292 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17294 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17298 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17300 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17306 and their options (in addition to
17309 \begin_inset space ~
17315 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17327 \begin_layout Labeling
17328 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17342 The possible options are:
17346 \begin_layout Labeling
17347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17352 This is the Roman font family.
17353 Normally a serif font.
17354 It's also the default family.
17364 \begin_layout Labeling
17365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17369 \begin_inset space ~
17376 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17388 \begin_layout Labeling
17389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17396 This is the Typewriter font family.
17402 arg "font-typewriter"
17408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17412 \begin_layout Standard
17414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17415 The general differences of these families are:
17418 \begin_layout Itemize
17420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17425 fonts use characters with serifs.
17426 These are the small
17427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17434 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17435 The following example shows the difference:
17436 \begin_inset Newline newline
17440 \begin_inset Newline newline
17445 text without serifs
17448 \begin_inset Newline newline
17451 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17452 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17459 \begin_layout Itemize
17461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17466 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17467 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17468 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17471 \begin_layout Itemize
17473 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17487 which means every character has the same width;
17489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17506 \begin_inset Newline newline
17510 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17528 \begin_inset Note Note
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17534 For more on phantoms see section
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17541 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17552 \begin_inset Newline newline
17561 \begin_layout Labeling
17562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17567 This corresponds to the print weight.
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17578 This is the Medium font series.
17579 It's also the default series.
17582 \begin_layout Labeling
17583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17590 This is the Bold font series.
17603 \begin_layout Labeling
17604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17609 As the name implies.
17614 \begin_layout Labeling
17615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17620 This is the Upright font shape.
17621 It's also the default shape.
17624 \begin_layout Labeling
17625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
17640 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
17645 s the Italic font shape
17651 \begin_layout Labeling
17652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17659 This is the Slanted font shape
17661 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
17663 this is different from italic).
17666 \begin_layout Labeling
17667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17671 \begin_inset space ~
17678 This is the Small caps font shape
17685 \begin_layout Labeling
17686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17688 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17693 Alters the text color.
17694 Note that not all DVI
17695 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
17697 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17698 viewers are able to display colors.
17702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
17704 \begin_inset space ~
17708 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17712 which means that the document default color set in
17714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17715 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17721 \begin_inset space ~
17728 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
17730 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
17734 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17829 \begin_inset Index idx
17834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17851 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
17857 \begin_layout Labeling
17858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17860 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
17865 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
17866 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17867 workarea in blue to indicate the change
17868 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
17869 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
17871 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
17873 \begin_inset Newline newline
17876 If you have for example,
17877 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17879 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17880 When using the spell checking (see section
17881 \begin_inset space ~
17885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17887 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17892 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17893 \begin_inset Newline newline
17896 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
17899 Exclude from Spellchecking
17902 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
17907 \begin_layout Labeling
17908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17913 Alters the size of the font.
17915 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
17917 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
17921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
17924 numerical values here;
17925 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
17927 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
17929 but a general description of what you want to do.
17934 \begin_layout Labeling
17935 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17956 arg "font-size tiny"
17962 \begin_layout Labeling
17963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17984 arg "font-size scriptsize"
17990 \begin_layout Labeling
17991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18012 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18018 \begin_layout Labeling
18019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18040 arg "font-size small"
18046 \begin_layout Labeling
18047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18061 It's also the default size.
18065 arg "font-size normal"
18071 \begin_layout Labeling
18072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18093 arg "font-size large"
18099 \begin_layout Labeling
18100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18121 arg "font-size larger"
18127 \begin_layout Labeling
18128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18149 arg "font-size largest"
18155 \begin_layout Labeling
18156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18177 arg "font-size huge"
18183 \begin_layout Labeling
18184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18205 arg "font-size giant"
18211 \begin_layout Labeling
18212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18217 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18238 arg "font-size increase"
18244 \begin_layout Labeling
18245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18250 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18271 arg "font-size decrease"
18277 \begin_layout Standard
18283 don't go crazy with this feature.
18284 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18286 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18288 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18289 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18294 \begin_layout Standard
18296 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18297 Another combo box allows to tweak
18304 \begin_layout Labeling
18305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18307 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18312 Alters the text color.
18313 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18319 which means that the document default color set in
18321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18322 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18328 \begin_inset space ~
18428 \begin_inset Index idx
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18439 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18444 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18462 \begin_layout Labeling
18463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18465 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18475 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18476 change a few other things at the character level
18477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18478 have text passages being underlined
18482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18483 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18484 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18485 when you could not change fonts.
18486 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18487 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18488 because some people
18492 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18499 \begin_layout Labeling
18500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18502 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18509 This is text with emphasize on
18512 This might seem like the same as
18517 but it is actually a bit different.
18523 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18524 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18525 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18529 \begin_layout Labeling
18530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18532 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18537 Don't use underlining.
18542 \begin_layout Labeling
18543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18568 arg "font-underline"
18574 \begin_inset Newline newline
18578 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18581 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18582 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18583 when you could not change fonts.
18584 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18585 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18586 because some people
18590 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18595 \begin_layout Labeling
18596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18600 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18611 This is text with Double under
18612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
18614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
18623 arg "font-underunderline"
18627 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
18629 \begin_inset Newline newline
18632 As we just warned you against using underbar,
18633 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
18638 \begin_layout Labeling
18639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18643 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
18645 \begin_inset space ~
18654 This is text with Wavy under
18655 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
18657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
18666 arg "font-underwave"
18670 \begin_inset Newline newline
18673 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
18674 Keep antinausea pills handy.
18675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
18680 \begin_layout Labeling
18681 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
18688 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
18694 \begin_layout Labeling
18695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
18702 Don't use strikethrough.
18705 \begin_layout Labeling
18706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18710 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
18724 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
18726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
18727 Single strikethrough
18735 arg "font-strikeout"
18739 \begin_inset Newline newline
18742 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
18745 \begin_layout Labeling
18746 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18748 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
18758 \begin_inset space ~
18762 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
18770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
18772 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
18778 \begin_inset Newline newline
18781 This is used to make text hardly readable.
18785 \begin_layout Standard
18787 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
18788 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
18791 \begin_layout Labeling
18792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18794 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
18799 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18800 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18801 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
18802 \begin_inset Newline newline
18805 If you have for example,
18806 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18808 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18809 When using the spell checking (see section
18810 \begin_inset space ~
18814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18816 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18821 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18822 \begin_inset Newline newline
18825 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18828 Exclude from Spellchecking
18831 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18834 \begin_layout Standard
18836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
18837 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
18838 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
18839 \begin_inset space ~
18843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18845 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
18851 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
18855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
18861 \begin_layout Itemize
18863 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
18871 This is text with emphasize on
18876 \begin_layout Itemize
18880 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
18888 This is text with Noun on.
18890 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
18898 this is a logical attribute.
18899 Normally it's equivalent to
18902 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_layout Standard
18913 So you have a huge number of combinations to
18914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
18916 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
18921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
18922 chosen a new character style
18923 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
18924 applied a text property
18927 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
18930 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18935 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
18943 arg "dialog-show character"
18949 arg "dialog-show character"
18954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
18958 You can activate the
18959 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
18961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
18962 last applied properties
18964 by using the toolbar button
18967 arg "textstyle-apply"
18971 The button lets you apply
18972 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
18973 your custom character style
18974 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
18977 even when the dialog isn't visible.
18979 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
18980 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
18981 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
18982 20) most recently applied settings,
18983 from which you can select one.
18988 \begin_layout Standard
18989 To completely reset the
18990 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
18992 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
18993 text properties of a selection
18997 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
18999 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19009 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19014 from the menu of the toolbar button
19017 arg "textstyle-apply"
19024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19025 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19045 \begin_inset space ~
19059 \begin_layout Standard
19061 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19062 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19070 \begin_inset space ~
19083 \begin_layout Itemize
19085 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19099 which means every character has the same width;
19101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19118 \begin_inset Newline newline
19122 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 \begin_inset Note Note
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 For more on phantoms see section
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19147 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19158 \begin_inset Newline newline
19164 \begin_layout Itemize
19166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19171 fonts use characters with serifs.
19172 These are the small
19173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19180 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19181 The following example shows the difference:
19182 \begin_inset Newline newline
19186 \begin_inset Newline newline
19191 text without serifs
19194 \begin_inset Newline newline
19197 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19198 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19205 \begin_layout Itemize
19207 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19212 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19213 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19214 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19219 \begin_layout Standard
19221 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19229 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19230 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19239 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19242 apply a style with properties A,
19243 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19246 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19247 the text ends up with properties A,
19251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19266 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19267 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19276 toggling behavior is up to you.
19280 \begin_inset space ~
19286 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19326 then apply the style to bold face text,
19327 the text will revert to the default series (
19328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19336 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19341 \begin_layout Standard
19343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19346 with the same warning once again:
19347 Do not overuse the fonts!
19349 more often than not,
19350 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19353 \begin_layout Section
19354 Printing and Previewing
19357 \begin_layout Subsection
19361 \begin_layout Standard
19362 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19364 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19365 Before we tell you that,
19366 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19367 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19369 Additional Features
19374 \begin_layout Standard
19376 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19379 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19380 typesetting system,
19381 but to prevent confusion,
19382 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19385 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19388 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19389 to turn your writing into printable output.
19390 This happens in two stages:
19393 \begin_layout Enumerate
19396 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19398 generating a file with the extension,
19400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19414 \begin_layout Enumerate
19417 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19418 to use the commands in the
19422 file to produce printable output.
19425 \begin_layout Subsection
19426 Output file formats
19427 \begin_inset Index idx
19432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19441 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19450 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19452 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19456 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19460 \begin_inset Index idx
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19474 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19490 \begin_layout Standard
19491 This file type has the extension
19492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19504 It contains your document as plain text
19505 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19507 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19508 following the rules of the
19509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19512 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19521 \begin_layout Standard
19522 You can export your document to
19523 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19525 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19530 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19531 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19533 \begin_inset space ~
19540 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19541 bibliography (section
19542 \begin_inset space ~
19546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19548 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19554 If your document includes such material,
19557 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19558 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19560 \begin_inset space ~
19564 \begin_inset space ~
19568 \begin_inset space ~
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19586 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19587 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19589 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19598 \begin_inset Index idx
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 \begin_layout Standard
19624 This file type has the extension
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19636 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19637 program to process your document.
19638 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
19640 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
19641 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
19642 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
19643 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
19644 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
19647 \begin_layout Standard
19648 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19649 -file using the menu
19651 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19652 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19656 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
19657 export variants are explained in section
19658 \begin_inset space ~
19662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19664 reference "subsec:Export"
19672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19674 \begin_inset Index idx
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 \begin_layout Standard
19699 This file type has the extension
19700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19721 because it is completely portable;
19722 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
19723 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
19727 \begin_layout Standard
19728 DVI files do not contain images,
19729 they only link to them.
19730 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
19731 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
19732 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
19733 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
19736 \begin_layout Standard
19737 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
19739 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19740 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19746 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19748 \begin_inset space ~
19754 The latter option uses the program
19756 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19762 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19765 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
19766 \begin_inset space ~
19770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19772 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19778 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19779 is still a work in progress,
19780 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
19784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19786 \begin_inset Index idx
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 \begin_layout Standard
19811 This file type has the extension
19812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19824 PostScript was developed by the company
19828 as a printer language.
19829 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
19830 PostScript can be seen as a
19831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19834 programming language
19835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19839 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 If you are interested in learning more about this,
19845 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19851 \begin_inset Index idx
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 As a result of this,
19879 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
19882 \begin_layout Standard
19883 PostScript can only contain images in the format
19884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19887 Encapsulated PostScript
19888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19905 As \SpecialChar LyX
19906 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
19907 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
19911 \begin_inset space ~
19914 images in your document,
19917 \begin_inset space ~
19920 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
19921 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
19923 So if you plan to use PostScript,
19924 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
19927 \begin_layout Standard
19928 You can export to PostScript using the menu
19930 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19931 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19939 \begin_inset Index idx
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 \begin_inset Index idx
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 \begin_layout Standard
19976 This file type has the extension
19977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19993 Portable Document Format
19994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20001 was derived from PostScript.
20002 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20012 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20015 \begin_layout Standard
20016 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20020 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20053 Portable Network Graphics
20054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20071 You can also use any other image format,
20072 because \SpecialChar LyX
20073 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20074 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20075 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20076 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20079 \begin_layout Standard
20080 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20082 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20088 \begin_layout Description
20090 \begin_inset space ~
20093 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20097 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20100 \begin_layout Description
20102 \begin_inset space ~
20109 ) This uses the program
20111 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20114 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20117 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20126 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20127 \begin_inset space ~
20131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20133 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20139 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20140 is still a work in progress,
20141 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20145 \begin_layout Description
20147 \begin_inset space ~
20154 ) This uses the program
20159 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20165 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20166 \begin_inset space ~
20170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20172 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20178 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20180 vertically written Japanese.
20183 \begin_layout Description
20185 \begin_inset space ~
20188 (cropped) This is the same as
20191 \begin_inset space ~
20196 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20197 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20198 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20201 \begin_layout Description
20203 \begin_inset space ~
20206 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20210 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20213 \begin_layout Description
20215 \begin_inset space ~
20218 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20222 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20223 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20227 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20228 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20231 \begin_layout Standard
20235 \begin_inset space ~
20244 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20247 and works without problems.
20248 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20249 or specific OpenType fonts,
20250 you might want to try out
20253 \begin_inset space ~
20261 \begin_inset space ~
20267 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20276 \begin_inset Index idx
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 \begin_inset Index idx
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 \begin_layout Standard
20313 This file type has the extension
20314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20326 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20327 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20328 When \SpecialChar LyX
20330 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20331 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20334 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20337 between different formats,
20338 which are described in section
20340 Math Output in XHTML
20345 \begin_inset space ~
20353 \begin_layout Standard
20354 XHTML output remains
20355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20363 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20364 features are supported yet.
20368 and the World Wide Web
20373 Additional Features
20376 for more information.
20379 \begin_layout Standard
20380 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20382 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20383 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20389 \begin_layout Subsection
20391 \begin_inset Index idx
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 \begin_layout Standard
20416 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20417 with all of the page breaks in place,
20418 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20428 or use the toolbar button
20435 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20436 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20443 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20448 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20449 \begin_inset space ~
20453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20455 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20461 Further output formats can be selected via
20463 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20464 View (Other Formats)
20466 or the toolbar button
20475 \begin_layout Standard
20476 If you have changed your document,
20477 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20485 Update (Other Formats)
20491 \begin_layout Standard
20492 When you preview a file,
20493 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20494 's temporary directory.
20495 To have a real output,
20496 export your document.
20499 \begin_layout Section
20500 A few Words about Typography
20501 \begin_inset Index idx
20506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 \begin_layout Subsection
20517 Dashes and Minus Signs
20518 \begin_inset Index idx
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20530 \begin_inset Index idx
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 \begin_layout Standard
20545 In \SpecialChar LyX
20548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20559 symbol comes in four variants:
20580 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20586 \begin_layout Standard
20587 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20597 height_special "totalheight"
20602 backgroundcolor "none"
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 \begin_inset Tabular
20607 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
20608 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20609 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20610 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20611 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20612 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20681 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 system key combination
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 the en dash is entered with
20713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20722 and the em dash with
20725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20738 is the Mac label for the right
20748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20761 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 system key combination or
20786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20800 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20813 \begin_inset Formula $-$
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20852 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20858 \begin_layout Standard
20859 Dashes can also be inserted with
20861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20863 \begin_inset space ~
20866 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
20874 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
20877 \begin_layout Standard
20878 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
20879 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
20880 Here are some examples:
20883 \begin_layout Enumerate
20884 line- and page-breaks
20885 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20895 \begin_layout Enumerate
20898 \begin_inset space ~
20902 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20912 \begin_layout Enumerate
20913 The em dash is used without spaces:
20916 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20926 \begin_layout Enumerate
20927 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
20931 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20941 \begin_layout Standard
20943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
20945 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
20946 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
20954 \begin_layout Subsection
20955 Dashes and Line Breaks
20956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20958 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
20965 \begin_layout Standard
20966 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
20968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20974 \begin_layout Itemize
20976 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
20977 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
20980 \begin_layout Itemize
20982 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
20985 \begin_layout Itemize
20986 In French and Spanish,
20987 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
20988 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
20991 \begin_layout Standard
20993 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
20994 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21005 allows line breaks after hyphens
21006 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21009 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21012 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21015 \begin_layout Enumerate
21016 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21017 \begin_inset space ~
21020 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21022 The Elements of Typographic Style
21025 \begin_inset space ~
21028 – can be prevented using
21029 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21031 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21037 \begin_layout Enumerate
21038 Unwanted line breaks
21043 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21045 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21048 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 Prevent Hyphenation
21060 \begin_inset space ~
21076 in \SpecialChar TeX
21078 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21081 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21083 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21085 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21086 space does not suffice
21090 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21098 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21099 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21112 \begin_layout Itemize
21114 \begin_inset space ~
21118 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21128 height_special "totalheight"
21133 backgroundcolor "none"
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 \begin_layout Itemize
21147 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21157 height_special "totalheight"
21162 backgroundcolor "none"
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 \begin_inset space ~
21175 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21176 \begin_inset space ~
21179 – sont très utiles.
21182 \begin_layout Itemize
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 un inciso con rayas—
21202 \begin_layout Standard
21203 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21204 \begin_inset space ~
21207 – in contrast to an overfull line
21208 \begin_inset space ~
21211 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21215 \begin_layout Standard
21216 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21217 you can select the option
21219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21220 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21221 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21222 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21227 \begin_layout Enumerate
21228 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21229 They can be prevented using
21230 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21232 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21235 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21241 \begin_layout Itemize
21243 \begin_inset space ~
21246 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21247 \begin_inset space ~
21250 – sont très utiles.
21254 \begin_layout Enumerate
21255 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21256 \begin_inset Newline newline
21261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21264 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21266 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21268 \begin_inset space ~
21274 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21276 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21278 \begin_inset space ~
21289 \begin_layout Itemize
21290 Em-dashes without spaces—
21291 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21292 common in American English—
21293 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21294 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21297 \begin_layout Standard
21298 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21299 \begin_inset space ~
21303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21305 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21317 \begin_layout Enumerate
21320 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21321 \begin_inset space ~
21325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21327 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21339 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21342 \begin_layout Standard
21343 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21345 \begin_inset space ~
21349 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21358 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21366 \begin_layout Standard
21367 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21369 \begin_inset space ~
21373 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21374 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21383 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21388 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 The behavior was changed since
21398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21416 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21417 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21425 \begin_layout Standard
21428 \begin_inset space ~
21436 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21438 \begin_inset space ~
21441 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21445 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21446 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21447 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21449 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21454 If you used both literal and
21455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21462 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21464 \begin_inset space ~
21468 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21471 \begin_layout Subsection
21473 \begin_inset Index idx
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21487 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21494 \begin_layout Standard
21495 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21496 but automatically in the output.
21497 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21503 \begin_inset Index idx
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 following the rules of the document language.
21527 does not hyphenate text in the
21531 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21534 \begin_layout Standard
21536 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21537 it only has problems with text in the
21541 font and with unusual constructs,
21543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21551 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21552 cannot break a word correctly,
21553 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21554 This is done with the menu
21556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21557 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21559 \begin_inset space ~
21565 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21567 If no hyphenation is necessary,
21572 \begin_layout Standard
21573 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
21574 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
21575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21584 would then see the hyphen
21585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21592 as a line break possibility.
21593 A line break at this point would look ugly.
21594 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
21596 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
21598 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21604 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21606 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
21608 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
21613 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
21615 Prevent Hyphenation
21620 \begin_inset space ~
21628 \begin_layout Subsection
21630 \begin_inset Index idx
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21645 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
21646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21648 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
21655 \begin_layout Standard
21656 When \SpecialChar LyX
21657 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
21658 to generate the final version of your document,
21660 automatically distinguishes between words,
21665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21668 appropriate amount of space.
21669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21672 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
21673 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
21676 \begin_layout Standard
21678 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
21680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21691 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
21692 it's the end of a sentence;
21693 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
21694 it's an abbreviation.
21697 \begin_layout Standard
21698 Here are some examples of
21702 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
21705 \begin_layout Itemize
21710 \begin_layout Itemize
21715 \begin_layout Standard
21716 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
21719 \begin_layout Itemize
21721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21725 this is too much space!
21728 \begin_layout Itemize
21733 \begin_layout Standard
21734 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
21737 \begin_layout Standard
21738 To fix this problem,
21739 use one of the following:
21742 \begin_layout Enumerate
21746 \begin_inset space ~
21751 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
21752 \begin_inset space ~
21756 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
21758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21760 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
21766 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
21768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21770 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
21778 \begin_inset Index idx
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21802 \begin_layout Enumerate
21806 \begin_inset space ~
21811 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
21812 \begin_inset space ~
21816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21818 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
21824 \begin_inset Index idx
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 \begin_layout Enumerate
21852 \begin_inset space ~
21856 \begin_inset space ~
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21869 \begin_inset space ~
21874 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
21875 This function is also bound to
21878 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
21884 \begin_layout Standard
21885 With the corrections,
21886 our earlier examples look like this:
21889 \begin_layout Itemize
21891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21895 \begin_inset space \space{}
21898 this is too much space!
21901 \begin_layout Itemize
21902 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
21906 \begin_layout Standard
21907 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
21908 If your language is such a language,
21909 you don't need to worry,
21910 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
21911 will take care of this.
21914 \begin_layout Standard
21915 For those that do need to bother,
21916 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
21920 \begin_inset space ~
21926 feature described in the section
21928 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
21933 Additional Features
21938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21940 \begin_inset Index idx
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 \begin_inset Index idx
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 \begin_layout Standard
21988 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
21990 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
21991 and use a closing mark at the end.
21994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22002 The keyboard character,
22008 generates this automatically.
22011 \begin_layout Standard
22012 You can specify what character the
22016 key produces by using the submenu
22022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22026 \begin_inset Index idx
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 dialog and switching the
22051 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22052 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22054 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22056 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22060 \begin_inset space ~
22066 \begin_layout Labeling
22067 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22079 \begin_inset space ~
22083 \begin_inset space ~
22087 \begin_inset Quotes els
22091 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22105 \begin_inset Quotes els
22109 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22112 quotation marks (as common,
22114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22121 \begin_layout Labeling
22122 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22125 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22129 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22133 \begin_inset space ~
22137 \begin_inset space ~
22141 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22145 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22151 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22155 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22159 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22163 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22166 quotation marks (as common,
22168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22175 \begin_layout Labeling
22176 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22179 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22183 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22187 \begin_inset space ~
22191 \begin_inset space ~
22195 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22199 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22205 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22209 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22213 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22217 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22220 quotation marks (as common,
22222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22229 \begin_layout Labeling
22230 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22233 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22237 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22241 \begin_inset space ~
22245 \begin_inset space ~
22249 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22253 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22259 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22263 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22267 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22271 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22274 quotation marks (as common,
22276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22283 \begin_layout Labeling
22284 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22287 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22291 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22295 \begin_inset space ~
22299 \begin_inset space ~
22303 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22307 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22313 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22317 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22321 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22325 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22328 quotation marks (as common,
22330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22337 \begin_layout Labeling
22338 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22341 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22345 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22349 \begin_inset space ~
22353 \begin_inset space ~
22357 \begin_inset Quotes als
22361 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22367 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22371 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22375 \begin_inset Quotes als
22379 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22382 quotation marks (as common,
22384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22391 \begin_layout Labeling
22392 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22395 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22399 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22403 \begin_inset space ~
22407 \begin_inset space ~
22411 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22415 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22421 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22425 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22429 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22433 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22436 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
22439 \begin_layout Labeling
22440 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22443 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22447 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22451 \begin_inset space ~
22455 \begin_inset space ~
22459 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22463 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22469 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22473 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22477 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22481 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22484 quotation marks (as common,
22486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22493 \begin_layout Labeling
22494 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22497 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22501 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22505 \begin_inset space ~
22509 \begin_inset space ~
22513 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22517 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22523 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22527 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22531 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22535 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22538 quotation marks (as common,
22540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22547 \begin_layout Labeling
22548 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22551 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22555 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22559 \begin_inset space ~
22563 \begin_inset space ~
22567 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22571 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22577 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22581 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22585 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22589 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22592 quotation marks (another style common in France)
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
22598 since these look identical to the inner marks.
22599 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
22607 \begin_layout Labeling
22608 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22611 \begin_inset Quotes rld
22615 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
22619 \begin_inset space ~
22623 \begin_inset space ~
22627 \begin_inset Quotes rls
22631 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
22637 \begin_inset Quotes rld
22641 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
22645 \begin_inset Quotes rls
22649 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
22652 quotation marks (as common,
22654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22661 \begin_layout Labeling
22662 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22665 \begin_inset Quotes wld
22669 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
22673 \begin_inset space ~
22677 \begin_inset space ~
22681 \begin_inset Quotes wls
22685 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
22691 \begin_inset Quotes wld
22695 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
22699 \begin_inset Quotes wls
22703 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
22706 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
22707 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
22711 \begin_layout Labeling
22712 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22714 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
22717 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22721 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22725 \begin_inset space ~
22729 \begin_inset space ~
22733 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22737 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22745 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22753 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22761 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22769 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22774 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
22779 \begin_layout Labeling
22780 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22781 \begin_inset Quotes jld
22789 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
22795 \begin_inset space ~
22799 \begin_inset space ~
22805 \begin_inset Quotes jls
22813 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
22817 \begin_inset Quotes jld
22821 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
22825 \begin_inset Quotes jls
22829 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
22832 quotation marks (as common,
22834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22844 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
22845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22847 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
22853 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
22861 \begin_layout Labeling
22862 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22863 \begin_inset Quotes kld
22871 \begin_inset Quotes krd
22877 \begin_inset space ~
22881 \begin_inset space ~
22887 \begin_inset Quotes kls
22895 \begin_inset Quotes krs
22899 \begin_inset Quotes kld
22903 \begin_inset Quotes krd
22907 \begin_inset Quotes kls
22911 \begin_inset Quotes krs
22914 quotation marks (as common,
22916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22920 in North Korea and China)
22921 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
22923 \begin_inset script superscript
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
22928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22930 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
22946 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22952 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22963 Inner quotation marks
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22968 In many writing cultures,
22969 these are single quotation marks.
22970 But as the British and French styles show,
22971 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
22972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22979 does not necessarily mean
22980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22988 This is why we call them
22989 \begin_inset Quotes els
22993 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23009 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23011 \begin_inset Quotes els
23015 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23018 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23021 arg "quote-insert inner"
23026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23032 \begin_layout Standard
23034 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23036 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23037 even if the document-wide style changes.
23038 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23039 If you check the setting
23041 Use dynamic quotation marks
23045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23046 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23051 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23052 they appear in a special color).
23053 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23054 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23059 if your publisher requests a different style).
23062 \begin_layout Standard
23063 Individual quotation marks (i.
23064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23068 their level [inner,
23072 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23075 \begin_layout Subsection
23077 \begin_inset Index idx
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_inset Index idx
23104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23123 name "subsec:Ligatures"
23130 \begin_layout Standard
23131 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
23132 These groups are known as
23137 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
23138 knows about ligatures,
23139 your documents will contain them too in the output.
23140 Here are the standard ligatures:
23143 \begin_layout Itemize
23147 \begin_layout Itemize
23151 \begin_layout Itemize
23155 \begin_layout Itemize
23159 \begin_layout Itemize
23163 \begin_layout Standard
23164 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
23167 \begin_layout Standard
23169 you don't want a ligature in a word.
23170 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
23172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23179 it looks really weird in compound words,
23181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23196 To break a ligature,
23199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23200 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23202 \begin_inset space ~
23209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23220 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23237 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23245 \begin_layout Subsection
23247 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
23249 \begin_inset Index idx
23254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 \begin_layout Standard
23277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23278 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
23283 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
23286 \begin_layout Description
23288 The name of the game.
23291 \begin_layout Description
23293 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
23297 \begin_layout Description
23299 The \SpecialChar TeX
23300 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
23304 \begin_layout Description
23305 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
23306 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23310 \begin_layout Standard
23311 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23317 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
23321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23325 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
23326 world to give programs geek version numbers.
23327 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
23328 converges to the number
23329 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
23333 The actual version is
23334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23343 the previous one was
23344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23355 \begin_layout Subsection
23357 \begin_inset Index idx
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 \begin_layout Standard
23382 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
23383 As you can see in the example below,
23384 it looks better when the space is smaller.
23386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23393 for units use the menu
23395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23396 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23398 \begin_inset space ~
23406 arg "space-insert thin"
23412 \begin_layout Standard
23413 Here is an example to show the differences:
23416 \begin_layout Standard
23417 \begin_inset Tabular
23418 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
23419 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23420 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23421 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 \begin_inset space ~
23432 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 space between number and unit
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23460 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 half space between number and unit
23485 \begin_layout Subsection
23487 \begin_inset Index idx
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 \begin_layout Standard
23512 In the early days of word processors,
23513 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
23514 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
23515 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
23516 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
23517 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
23518 These bits of text became known as
23529 \begin_layout Standard
23532 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
23533 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
23534 But what about widows and orphans,
23535 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
23536 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
23537 governing page breaks,
23538 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
23539 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
23540 you can add the commands
23541 \begin_inset Newline newline
23549 \begin_inset Newline newline
23557 \begin_inset Newline newline
23560 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23561 preamble of your document to avoid them.
23562 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
23564 \begin_inset space ~
23568 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23570 key "latexcompanion"
23576 \begin_inset space ~
23580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23587 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23588 's page break mechanism.
23591 \begin_layout Chapter
23595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23597 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
23604 \begin_layout Standard
23605 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23608 \begin_inset space ~
23614 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23617 \begin_layout Section
23619 \begin_inset Index idx
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23640 \begin_layout Standard
23642 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
23645 \begin_layout Description
23648 \begin_inset space ~
23651 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
23652 \begin_inset Newline newline
23656 \begin_inset Note Note
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
23668 \begin_layout Description
23669 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
23670 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
23673 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
23674 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
23676 \begin_inset space ~
23682 \begin_inset Newline newline
23686 \begin_inset Note Comment
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
23699 \begin_layout Description
23701 \begin_inset space ~
23704 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
23706 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
23708 \begin_inset space ~
23714 \begin_inset Newline newline
23718 \begin_inset Newline newline
23722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
23732 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
23737 of a comment that appears in the output.
23743 \begin_inset Newline newline
23747 \begin_inset Newline newline
23750 As you can see in the example,
23751 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
23754 \begin_layout Standard
23755 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
23763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23767 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
23770 \begin_layout Section
23772 \begin_inset Index idx
23777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23786 name "sec:Footnotes"
23793 \begin_layout Standard
23795 uses boxes to display footnotes:
23796 When you insert a footnote using the menu
23798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23801 or the toolbar button
23804 arg "footnote-insert"
23818 \begin_inset Graphics
23819 filename clipart/footnote.png
23828 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
23829 's representation of your footnote.
23839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23863 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
23864 Clicking on the box label again will close
23877 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
23878 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
23893 \begin_layout Standard
23894 Here is an example footnote:
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 To close a footnote,
23904 click on the footnote box label.
23912 \begin_layout Standard
23913 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
23914 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
23915 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
23916 according to the document class.
23918 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
23919 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23925 ey are described in the
23928 \begin_inset space ~
23936 \begin_layout Section
23938 \begin_inset Index idx
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23952 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
23959 \begin_layout Standard
23960 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
23962 When you insert a margin note via the menu
23964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23966 \begin_inset space ~
23971 or the toolbar button
23974 arg "marginalnote-insert"
23994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24001 appearing within your text.
24002 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24003 's representation of your margin
24012 \begin_layout Standard
24013 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24017 \begin_inset Marginal
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 This is a marginal note.
24030 \begin_layout Standard
24031 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24032 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24033 right on odd pages.
24036 \begin_layout Standard
24037 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24040 \begin_inset space ~
24048 \begin_inset space ~
24056 \begin_layout Section
24057 Graphics and Images
24058 \begin_inset Index idx
24063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 \begin_inset Index idx
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24084 name "sec:Graphics"
24091 \begin_layout Standard
24092 To insert an image in your document,
24093 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24096 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24105 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24108 \begin_layout Standard
24109 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24114 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24115 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24116 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24117 \begin_inset space ~
24121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24123 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
24131 \begin_layout Standard
24136 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
24137 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
24140 \begin_inset space ~
24144 \begin_inset space ~
24153 \begin_inset space ~
24157 \begin_inset space ~
24161 \begin_inset space ~
24166 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
24167 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
24174 \begin_layout Standard
24178 \begin_inset space ~
24182 \begin_inset space ~
24187 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
24188 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
24190 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
24195 \begin_inset space ~
24200 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
24201 only a frame with the image size is printed.
24204 \begin_layout Standard
24205 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
24206 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
24207 This is an example image within a separate,
24208 horizontally centered paragraph:
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24213 \begin_inset Graphics
24214 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
24222 \begin_layout Standard
24223 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
24224 you have to put the image into a float,
24226 \begin_inset space ~
24230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24232 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24240 \begin_layout Subsection
24242 \begin_inset Index idx
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24266 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
24273 \begin_layout Standard
24274 You can insert images in any known file format.
24275 But as we explained in section
24276 \begin_inset space ~
24280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24282 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24288 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
24290 therefore uses the program
24294 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
24295 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
24296 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
24297 \begin_inset space ~
24301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24303 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24311 \begin_layout Standard
24312 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
24315 \begin_layout Description
24317 \begin_inset space ~
24320 images consist of pixel values,
24321 often in a compressed form.
24322 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
24323 Well-known bitmap image formats are
24324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24327 Graphics Interchange Format
24328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24345 \begin_inset Index idx
24350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24371 Portable Network Graphics
24372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24389 \begin_inset Index idx
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24415 Joint Photographic Experts Group
24416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24445 \begin_inset Index idx
24450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24452 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24469 \begin_layout Description
24471 \begin_inset space ~
24474 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
24475 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
24476 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
24477 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
24478 \begin_inset Newline newline
24481 Scalable image formats can be
24482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24485 Scalable Vector Graphics
24486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24503 \begin_inset Index idx
24508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24529 Encapsulated PostScript
24530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24547 \begin_inset Index idx
24552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24573 Portable Document Format
24574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24591 \begin_inset Index idx
24596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24612 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
24613 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24618 In the case of PDF,
24619 the original image is additionally compressed.
24627 \begin_layout Standard
24628 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
24636 \begin_layout Subsection
24637 Grouping of Image Settings
24638 \begin_inset Index idx
24643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24662 \begin_layout Standard
24663 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
24664 Images within such a group share their settings,
24665 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
24666 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
24669 \begin_layout Standard
24670 A new group can be set by pressing the button
24673 \begin_inset space ~
24677 \begin_inset space ~
24689 \begin_inset space ~
24693 \begin_inset space ~
24699 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
24702 \begin_layout Section
24704 \begin_inset Index idx
24709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24725 \begin_layout Standard
24726 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
24729 arg "tabular-insert"
24734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24738 A dialog will appear,
24739 asking you for the number of rows and columns
24740 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
24742 and you can select a specific (border) style
24745 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
24746 This separation appears due to a double line:
24747 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
24748 Here is an example table:
24751 \begin_layout Standard
24753 \begin_inset Tabular
24754 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
24755 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24756 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24757 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24758 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
24759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
24957 \begin_layout Standard
24959 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
24960 This corresponds to the
24961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24968 table style listed in the style selection.
24971 \begin_layout Standard
24973 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
24974 Other available styles include:
24977 \begin_layout Itemize
24979 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
24981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24988 which looks line the above table,
24989 but without the first row being separated via double line,
24992 \begin_layout Itemize
24994 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
24995 a border-less table with no lines at all,
24998 \begin_layout Itemize
25000 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25009 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25020 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25021 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25026 \begin_layout Standard
25028 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25029 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25032 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25036 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25037 you should alter this setting.
25040 \begin_layout Subsection
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25047 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25051 This brings up the table dialog.
25052 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25053 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25054 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25055 This means that if you select more cells,
25056 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25059 \begin_layout Standard
25060 In addition to the table dialog,
25064 \begin_inset space ~
25069 helps you in setting table properties.
25070 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25073 \begin_layout Standard
25077 \begin_inset space ~
25082 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25083 If you add a row or column,
25084 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25085 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25086 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25088 \begin_inset space ~
25092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25094 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25102 \begin_layout Standard
25103 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25112 This will merge the cells to
25117 spread over more than one column/row.
25118 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25119 so that the alignment,
25121 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25122 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25125 \begin_layout Standard
25127 \begin_inset Tabular
25128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
25129 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
25130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25131 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
25132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 \begin_layout Standard
25265 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
25266 -arguments for the table.
25267 They are necessary for special table formatting,
25268 such as the multirow cells,
25269 explained in the chapter
25276 \begin_inset space ~
25282 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
25283 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25284 but are visible in the output.
25287 \begin_layout Standard
25288 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 Most DVI-viewers are
25301 able to display rotations.
25309 \begin_layout Standard
25314 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
25319 adds lines for all cell borders.
25322 \begin_layout Subsection
25324 \begin_inset Index idx
25329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Index idx
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 \begin_layout Standard
25361 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
25362 you can use the option
25365 \begin_inset space ~
25369 \begin_inset space ~
25377 \begin_inset space ~
25382 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
25383 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
25386 \begin_layout Description
25392 The current row and all rows above,
25393 that don't have any special options defined,
25394 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
25395 Except for the first page,
25399 \begin_inset space ~
25407 \begin_layout Description
25411 \begin_inset space ~
25417 The current row and all rows above,
25418 that don't have any special options defined,
25419 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
25422 \begin_layout Description
25428 The current row and all rows below,
25429 that don't have any special options defined,
25430 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
25431 except for the last page,
25435 \begin_inset space ~
25443 \begin_layout Description
25447 \begin_inset space ~
25453 The current row and all rows below,
25454 that don't have any special options defined,
25455 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
25458 \begin_layout Description
25460 The first row is reset as a single column.
25461 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
25463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25467 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
25470 \begin_inset space ~
25478 \begin_layout Standard
25479 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
25480 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
25481 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
25482 the others will be defined as
25488 first means first in this order:
25493 \begin_inset space ~
25507 \begin_inset space ~
25513 see the following longtable to see how it works:
25516 \begin_layout Standard
25518 \begin_inset Tabular
25519 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
25520 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
25521 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
25522 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25523 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25524 <row endfirsthead="true">
25525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
25536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25555 <row endfirsthead="true">
25556 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25588 <row endhead="true">
25589 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25600 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25619 <row endhead="true">
25620 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25631 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25640 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25652 <row endfoot="true">
25653 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25664 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25673 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25704 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26646 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27264 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27326 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27636 <row endlastfoot="true">
27637 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27648 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27657 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27674 \begin_layout Subsection
27676 \begin_inset Index idx
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27683 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27700 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27708 A table cell can contain text,
27712 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
27713 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
27714 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
27720 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
27725 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
27726 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
27730 \begin_layout Standard
27732 \begin_inset Tabular
27733 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
27734 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27735 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27736 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
27737 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27757 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27826 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
27831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27882 This is longer now.
27887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
27939 This is longer now.
27944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27970 \begin_layout Standard
27971 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
27972 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
27976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27977 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
27982 Selection with the mouse or with
27986 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
27987 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
27990 \begin_layout Section
27992 \begin_inset Index idx
27997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28013 \begin_layout Subsection
28017 \begin_layout Standard
28018 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28019 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28028 forward or backward a page or two,
28029 to wherever it fits best.
28037 \begin_inset space ~
28043 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28046 \begin_layout Standard
28047 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28048 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28049 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28050 every float can be referenced in the text.
28051 Floats are therefore numbered.
28052 Referencing is described in section
28053 \begin_inset space ~
28057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28059 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28067 \begin_layout Standard
28071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28075 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28076 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28077 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28078 \begin_inset Index idx
28083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28085 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28099 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28100 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28101 -document readable,
28102 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28103 A closed float box looks like this:
28105 \begin_inset Graphics
28106 filename clipart/float.png
28111 – a gray button with a red label.
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28115 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28116 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28119 \begin_layout Subsection
28121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28123 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
28128 \begin_inset Index idx
28133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28154 \begin_inset space ~
28158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28160 reference "fig:A-star-in"
28165 was created using the menu
28167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28168 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28174 arg "float-insert figure"
28178 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
28180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28186 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
28190 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
28192 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28194 \begin_inset space ~
28202 arg "layout-paragraph"
28208 \begin_layout Standard
28209 \begin_inset Float figure
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28218 \begin_inset Graphics
28219 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28229 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28234 name "fig:A-star-in"
28251 \begin_layout Standard
28252 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
28253 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
28255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28264 ) and refer to it using the menu
28266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28272 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28276 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
28277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28286 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28287 will reposition the floats in the final document,
28289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28297 For more about cross-references,
28299 \begin_inset space ~
28303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28305 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
28315 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
28316 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
28317 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
28318 \begin_inset space ~
28322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28324 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28337 reference "fig:Two-images"
28342 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
28343 You can also set the images one below the other.
28345 \begin_inset space ~
28349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28351 reference "fig:Undefinable"
28357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28359 reference "fig:Star"
28364 are the subfigures.
28367 \begin_layout Standard
28368 \begin_inset Float figure
28375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28376 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28380 \begin_inset Float figure
28387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28388 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28393 name "fig:Undefinable"
28405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28406 \begin_inset Graphics
28407 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
28419 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28423 \begin_inset Float figure
28430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28431 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28449 \begin_inset Graphics
28450 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28462 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28469 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28474 name "fig:Two-images"
28491 \begin_layout Subsection
28493 \begin_inset Index idx
28498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28500 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
28520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28521 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28524 or the toolbar button
28527 arg "float-insert table"
28531 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
28533 \begin_inset space ~
28537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28539 reference "tab:Table-float"
28547 \begin_layout Standard
28548 \begin_inset Float table
28555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28556 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28561 name "tab:Table-float"
28573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28575 \begin_inset Tabular
28576 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
28577 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28707 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
28715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28728 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
28731 \end{array}\right]$
28739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28752 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
28773 \begin_layout Subsection
28775 \begin_inset Index idx
28780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28799 \begin_layout Standard
28801 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
28802 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
28803 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
28804 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
28811 \begin_inset space ~
28819 \begin_layout Section
28821 \begin_inset Index idx
28826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28835 \begin_layout Standard
28837 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
28840 all the usual rules of indentation,
28843 \begin_inset space \space{}
28849 \begin_layout Standard
28850 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
28851 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
28853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28857 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
28860 \begin_layout Standard
28862 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28872 height_special "totalheight"
28877 backgroundcolor "none"
28880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28883 This is a minipage.
28884 The text is set in an italic style.
28887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28890 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
28898 \begin_layout Standard
28899 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
28902 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
28907 as described in section
28908 \begin_inset space ~
28912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28914 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
28920 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
28926 \begin_layout Standard
28927 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28937 height_special "totalheight"
28942 backgroundcolor "none"
28945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28946 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
28947 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
28953 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28957 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28967 height_special "totalheight"
28972 backgroundcolor "none"
28975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28976 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
28977 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28986 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28992 \begin_layout Standard
28993 When you right-click on a minipage box,
28994 you can transform the box to another box type.
28995 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29002 \begin_inset space ~
29010 \begin_layout Chapter
29011 Mathematical Formulas
29012 \begin_inset Index idx
29017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29024 \begin_inset Index idx
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29031 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29048 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29056 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29061 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29064 \begin_layout Section
29066 \begin_inset Index idx
29071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29073 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29090 \begin_layout Standard
29091 To create a math formula,
29092 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29105 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29106 with purple markers around its corners.
29107 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29108 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29109 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29117 \begin_layout Standard
29118 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29121 \begin_inset space ~
29127 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
29130 \begin_layout Standard
29131 There are two main types of formulas,
29132 inline formulas and display formulas.
29133 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 This is a line with an inline formula
29139 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29146 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
29148 \begin_inset Formula
29155 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
29158 \begin_layout Standard
29160 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29178 followed by a space,
29179 in a formula will create the Greek letter
29180 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
29184 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29195 \begin_layout Subsection
29196 Navigating in Formulas
29197 \begin_inset Index idx
29202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29204 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29221 \begin_layout Standard
29222 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
29224 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
29225 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
29230 will leave a formula construct (a square root
29231 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
29236 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
29241 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29244 \end{array}\right]$
29252 will leave the formula,
29253 placing the cursor after the formula.
29258 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
29260 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
29263 \begin_layout Standard
29269 printed in this document as
29270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29274 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29282 seems to do nothing in a formula,
29283 since it does not add a space between characters,
29284 but it does exit a nested structure.
29286 you have to be careful about using
29293 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
29302 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29312 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29316 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29322 since in the latter case only the
29325 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
29330 will be under the square root sign:
29332 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
29338 \begin_layout Standard
29339 You can leave many parts of a formula,
29341 partially filled in,
29343 \begin_inset Formula
29345 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29354 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
29355 or a subscript with nothing in it,
29356 the results will be unpredictable,
29357 but most constructs don't mind.
29360 \begin_layout Subsection
29364 \begin_layout Standard
29365 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
29366 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
29371 and a cursor movement key to select text.
29372 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
29374 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
29375 That text can then be cut or copied,
29376 and then pasted within any formula,
29377 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
29381 \begin_layout Subsection
29382 Exponents and Subscripts
29383 \begin_inset Index idx
29388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29390 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29405 \begin_inset Index idx
29410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29412 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29429 \begin_layout Standard
29430 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
29433 arg "math-superscript"
29439 arg "math-subscript"
29443 but it is often much easier to use a command.
29445 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
29452 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29462 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
29469 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
29474 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
29481 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29487 If you use characters in the superscript,
29488 that could be accented with the circumflex
29489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29497 you have to use an extra
29501 to separate the circumflex and the character.
29504 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
29511 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29517 Subscripts are similar:
29519 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
29526 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29534 \begin_layout Subsection
29536 \begin_inset Index idx
29541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29543 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29560 \begin_layout Standard
29561 Create a fraction either with the command
29567 or by using the icon
29570 arg "math-insert \\frac"
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29582 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
29583 The cursor is above the fraction line.
29584 To move it to the bottom,
29596 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
29597 as this example shows:
29598 \begin_inset Formula
29600 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
29603 \end{array}\right)}\right]
29611 \begin_layout Subsection
29613 \begin_inset Index idx
29618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29620 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29637 \begin_layout Standard
29638 Roots can be created using the
29641 \begin_inset space ~
29649 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
29655 arg "math-insert \\root"
29677 you can produce roots of higher orders,
29685 always produces a square root.
29688 \begin_layout Subsection
29689 Operators with Limits
29690 \begin_inset Index idx
29695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29697 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29712 \begin_inset Index idx
29717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29719 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29736 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
29743 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
29749 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
29752 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
29753 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29754 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
29755 directly after the symbol.
29756 The sum operator will automatically place its
29757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29764 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
29765 and to the side in inline formulas,
29767 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
29772 \begin_inset Formula
29774 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
29781 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29785 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
29786 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
29788 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29789 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29791 \begin_inset space ~
29795 \begin_inset space ~
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29810 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
29811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 \begin_inset Index idx
29825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29827 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29842 \begin_inset Formula
29844 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
29849 which will place the
29850 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
29854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29862 In inline formulas it looks like this:
29864 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
29878 Have a look at section
29879 \begin_inset space ~
29883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29885 reference "subsec:Functions"
29890 for an explanation of function macros.
29893 \begin_layout Subsection
29895 \begin_inset Index idx
29900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29920 Most math symbols can be found in the
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29928 under one of several categories;
29949 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
29952 \begin_layout Standard
29953 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29954 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
29955 you don't have to use the
29958 \begin_inset space ~
29964 you can type the command directly into the formula.
29966 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
29969 \begin_layout Subsection
29971 \begin_inset Index idx
29976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29978 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30002 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30016 arg "math-insert \\space"
30020 This generates a small space,
30021 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30029 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30032 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30034 \begin_inset Graphics
30035 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30040 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30041 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30042 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30044 because they are negative spaces.
30045 Here are two examples:
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30059 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30065 \begin_layout Standard
30076 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30082 \begin_layout Subsection
30084 \begin_inset Index idx
30089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30091 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30108 name "subsec:Functions"
30115 \begin_layout Standard
30119 \begin_inset space ~
30124 contains under the button
30127 arg "math-insert \\functions"
30130 a number of function macros,
30132 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
30137 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
30146 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
30153 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
30155 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
30159 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30166 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
30168 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
30172 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
30178 \begin_layout Standard
30179 For some mathematical objects,
30181 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
30182 as described in section
30183 \begin_inset space ~
30187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30189 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30197 \begin_layout Subsection
30199 \begin_inset Index idx
30204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30206 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30223 \begin_layout Standard
30224 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
30225 This may depend on your keyboard,
30226 or the bindings file you use.
30227 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30231 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30234 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
30235 Our example is entered by typing
30240 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30247 \begin_inset space ~
30251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30253 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
30258 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 \begin_inset Float table
30269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30270 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30275 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
30279 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 \begin_inset Tabular
30290 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
30291 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30294 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30432 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
30442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30486 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
30496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30540 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
30550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
30604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
30658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30702 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
30712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30756 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
30766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30810 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
30820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30855 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30877 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
30880 \begin_inset space ~
30888 arg "math-insert \\hat"
30892 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
30895 \begin_layout Section
30896 Brackets and Delimiters
30897 \begin_inset Index idx
30902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30904 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 \begin_inset Index idx
30924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30926 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30943 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
30954 using just the keys
30959 But if you want to surround a large structure,
30960 like a matrix or a fraction,
30961 or if you have several layers of brackets,
30962 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
30965 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
30970 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
30971 \begin_inset Formula
30973 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
30981 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
30983 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
30986 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
30989 and the expression on the right was entered using the
30995 \begin_inset Formula
30997 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31005 \begin_layout Standard
31006 If you use the delimiter icon,
31008 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31011 \begin_layout Standard
31012 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31013 If you use the option
31016 \begin_inset space ~
31022 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31023 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31025 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31031 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31032 with a dotted line,
31033 but nothing will be printed.
31036 \begin_layout Standard
31037 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31038 like a square root,
31039 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31040 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31045 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31048 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31050 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31051 select the structure and enter
31054 arg "math-delim ( )"
31060 \begin_layout Section
31061 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31062 \begin_inset Index idx
31067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31084 \begin_inset Index idx
31089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31106 \begin_inset Index idx
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31117 Multi-line Equations
31130 \begin_layout Standard
31131 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
31135 \begin_inset space ~
31143 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
31147 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
31148 Here is an example:
31149 \begin_inset Formula
31151 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
31160 The parentheses aren't automatic,
31161 but you can add them as described in section
31162 \begin_inset space ~
31166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31168 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31174 When you construct the matrix,
31175 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
31177 or center-justified.
31178 This alignment is set in the box
31183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31234 for every column as default.
31237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31248 means that the first column will be left-justified,
31249 the second will be centered,
31250 and the third column will be right-justified,
31251 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
31252 The result will look like this:
31253 \begin_inset Formula
31256 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
31257 column & has & has\,right\\
31258 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
31267 \begin_layout Standard
31268 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
31271 arg "newline-insert newline"
31274 while the cursor is in the matrix.
31275 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
31277 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31280 or the math toolbar.
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31284 There are other arrays used in formulas,
31285 such as distinctions of cases.
31286 It can be created with the menu
31288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31289 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31291 \begin_inset space ~
31303 Here is an example:
31305 \begin_inset Formula
31319 \begin_layout Standard
31320 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31323 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
31326 arg "newline-insert newline"
31330 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
31331 one for each column.
31335 arg "newline-insert newline"
31338 in a non-empty formula,
31339 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
31340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31347 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
31348 the relation sign is in the second column,
31349 and the rest in the third column.
31350 A new row is created by every further entry of
31353 arg "newline-insert newline"
31357 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
31358 Here is an example:
31359 \begin_inset Formula
31361 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
31362 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
31367 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
31368 \begin_inset Formula
31370 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31379 The multi-line formula type described here is called
31386 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
31387 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
31388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31390 reference "eq:asquared"
31396 The other types are described in section
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31403 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31411 \begin_layout Section
31412 Formula Numbering and Referencing
31413 \begin_inset Index idx
31418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31420 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31435 \begin_inset Index idx
31440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31446 Referencing formulas
31457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31459 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 To number a formula,
31468 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
31470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31471 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31473 \begin_inset space ~
31477 \begin_inset space ~
31485 arg "math-number-toggle"
31489 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31490 within parentheses.
31491 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
31492 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
31493 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
31494 separated by a dot:
31495 \begin_inset Formula
31505 arg "math-number-toggle"
31508 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
31509 You can only number displayed formulas.
31512 \begin_layout Standard
31513 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
31516 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31517 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31519 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_inset space ~
31531 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
31534 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
31535 \begin_inset Formula
31538 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
31544 To number all lines use the shortcut
31547 arg "math-number-toggle"
31553 \begin_layout Standard
31554 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31557 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
31558 A label is inserted with the menu
31560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31569 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
31570 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
31571 It is recommended that you use the suggested
31572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31583 as the first part of the label,
31584 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
31585 We inserted in the following example the label
31586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31593 in the second line:
31594 \begin_inset Formula
31596 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
31597 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
31602 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
31603 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
31604 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
31606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31608 \begin_inset space ~
31616 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
31620 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
31621 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31622 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
31625 \begin_layout Standard
31626 This is a cross-reference to equation (
31627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31629 reference "eq:tanhExp"
31637 \begin_layout Standard
31638 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
31639 's cross-reference box are described in section
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31646 reference "sec:Cross-References"
31653 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
31660 \begin_layout Section
31661 User defined math macros
31662 \begin_inset Index idx
31667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31669 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31686 \begin_layout Standard
31688 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
31689 Math macros are explained in section
31692 \begin_inset space ~
31704 \begin_layout Section
31708 \begin_layout Subsection
31710 \begin_inset Index idx
31715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31717 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31734 \begin_layout Standard
31735 The standard font for text is italic,
31736 for numbers the standard is roman.
31737 To set a font in a formula,
31741 \begin_inset space ~
31749 arg "math-insert \\font"
31753 or enter its command,
31755 \begin_inset space ~
31759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31761 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
31770 \begin_layout Standard
31771 \begin_inset Float table
31778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31779 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31784 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
31788 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 \begin_inset Tabular
31799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
31800 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31834 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
31842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31861 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
31869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31888 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
31896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31921 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
31929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31948 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
31956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31970 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
31971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31976 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
31977 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
31985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31990 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32006 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32040 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32062 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32068 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32076 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32089 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32105 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32149 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
32152 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
32155 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
32159 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
32179 \begin_layout Standard
32180 When you use a typeface,
32181 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
32182 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
32187 within the box will set the cursor outside,
32188 so that you have to use a
32189 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
32191 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
32194 space when you need a space in the box.
32195 Here is an example where
32196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32207 denotes the set of numbers:
32208 \begin_inset Formula
32210 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 The typefaces are nestable,
32220 which can cause confusion.
32233 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
32237 \begin_inset Newline newline
32240 So it is better not to use this feature.
32243 \begin_layout Standard
32244 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
32246 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
32250 \begin_inset Newline newline
32253 You can only print them emboldened using the command
32260 which works like the other typeface commands:
32262 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
32268 \begin_layout Standard
32275 works for all symbols,
32280 \begin_layout Standard
32281 A number of other font options are available as well,
32284 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32285 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32287 \begin_inset space ~
32295 \begin_layout Subsection
32297 \begin_inset Index idx
32302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32304 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32321 \begin_layout Standard
32322 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
32324 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
32325 which is obtained using the entry
32328 \begin_inset space ~
32332 \begin_inset space ~
32340 \begin_inset space ~
32348 arg "math-insert \\font"
32352 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32353 in black instead of blue.
32354 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
32355 Here is an example:
32356 \begin_inset Formula
32359 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
32360 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
32369 \begin_layout Subsection
32371 \begin_inset Index idx
32376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32378 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32395 \begin_layout Standard
32396 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
32397 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
32418 For most characters,
32427 are actually the same size,
32429 superscripts and subscripts,
32430 and certain other structures,
32436 Except for some operators,
32437 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
32438 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
32439 thinks are appropriate.
32440 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
32443 arg "math-insert \\style"
32447 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
32450 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
32454 which is normally in
32465 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
32469 The four styles are used in the following example:
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32473 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
32478 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
32483 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
32488 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
32494 \begin_layout Standard
32495 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
32497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32499 \begin_inset space ~
32505 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
32507 if the base font size of the document is changed,
32508 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
32509 As an example here is a formula in the font size
32510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32520 \begin_layout Standard
32524 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
32530 \begin_layout Section
32531 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32533 \begin_inset Index idx
32538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32545 \begin_inset Index idx
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32552 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32569 \begin_layout Standard
32571 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
32574 \begin_layout Subsection
32575 Enabling AMS-Support
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
32580 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
32596 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
32597 selecting the checkbox
32600 \begin_inset space ~
32604 \begin_inset space ~
32608 \begin_inset space ~
32617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32621 \begin_inset Index idx
32626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32628 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32645 \begin_inset space ~
32651 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
32652 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32653 -errors in formulas,
32654 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
32657 \begin_layout Subsection
32659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32661 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
32666 \begin_inset Index idx
32671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32673 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32677 Multi-line Equations
32690 \begin_layout Standard
32691 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32692 provides a selection of different formula types.
32694 allows you to choose between
32719 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
32721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32729 for an explanation of these formula types.
32732 \begin_layout Chapter
32736 \begin_layout Section
32738 \begin_inset Index idx
32743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32752 name "sec:Cross-References"
32759 \begin_layout Standard
32760 One of \SpecialChar LyX
32761 's strengths is cross-references.
32762 You can reference every section,
32766 and list in the document.
32767 To reference a document part,
32768 you have to insert a label into it.
32769 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
32770 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
32773 \begin_layout Enumerate
32777 \begin_layout Enumerate
32778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32780 name "enu:Second-item"
32787 \begin_layout Enumerate
32791 \begin_layout Standard
32792 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
32794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32797 or by pressing the toolbar button
32804 A gray label box like this:
32806 \begin_inset Graphics
32807 filename clipart/label.png
32811 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
32813 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
32814 in our case the text
32815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32848 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
32850 if you insert a label into a section heading,
32851 the suggested prefix will be
32852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32867 To reference the item,
32868 we refer to its label using the menu
32870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32873 or the toolbar button
32876 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32880 A gray cross-reference box like this:
32882 \begin_inset Graphics
32883 filename clipart/reference.png
32887 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
32888 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
32889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32901 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
32904 \begin_layout Standard
32905 As an alternative to
32907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32911 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
32916 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
32918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 Here is our cross-reference:
32933 \begin_inset space ~
32937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32939 reference "enu:Second-item"
32947 \begin_layout Standard
32948 It is recommended to use a
32949 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
32951 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
32958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32959 described in section
32960 \begin_inset space ~
32964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32966 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
32976 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
32979 \begin_layout Standard
32980 There are eight formats of cross-references:
32983 \begin_layout Description
32986 this is the default:
32988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32990 reference "fig:Two-images"
32998 \begin_layout Description
33000 prints the number within two parentheses,
33001 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33002 especially when the reference name
33003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33014 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33022 \begin_layout Description
33024 prints the page number:
33026 \begin_inset space ~
33030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33031 LatexCommand pageref
33032 reference "fig:Two-images"
33040 \begin_layout Description
33042 \begin_inset space ~
33046 \begin_inset space ~
33050 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33053 LatexCommand vpageref
33054 reference "fig:Two-images"
33060 \begin_inset Newline newline
33063 If the label is on the same page,
33064 it prints “on this page”;
33065 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33066 it prints “on the facing page”;
33067 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33068 it prints “on the previous page”;
33069 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33070 it prints “on the next page”.
33071 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33074 \begin_layout Description
33076 \begin_inset space ~
33080 \begin_inset space ~
33084 \begin_inset space ~
33089 the text “on page” and the page number:
33091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33093 reference "fig:Two-images"
33099 \begin_inset Newline newline
33102 If the label is on the same page,
33103 this format behaves like
33110 otherwise it behaves like
33114 \begin_inset space ~
33118 \begin_inset space ~
33127 \begin_layout Description
33129 \begin_inset space ~
33133 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
33134 \begin_inset Newline newline
33138 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33147 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33157 \begin_inset Index idx
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33180 \begin_inset Index idx
33185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33188 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33208 \begin_inset Newline newline
33211 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
33212 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
33214 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
33218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33227 is the default and preferred because
33231 supports only English documents.
33232 The format is specified by using the command
33236 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33245 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33246 preamble of the document.
33247 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
33248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33264 \begin_inset Newline newline
33271 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
33276 \begin_inset Newline newline
33287 predefines reference formats for all available types.
33288 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
33289 So if you want to make formatted references to,
33292 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
33298 you might do so as follows:
33299 \begin_inset Newline newline
33306 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33307 format{prop}{Proposition
33312 \begin_inset Newline newline
33315 For more information about defining formatted references,
33316 have a look at the package documentation
33317 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33319 key "prettyref,refstyle"
33325 \begin_inset Newline newline
33336 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
33343 \begin_layout Description
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33349 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
33351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33352 LatexCommand nameref
33353 reference "fig:Two-images"
33361 \begin_layout Description
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33367 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33368 label for the reference:
33370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33371 LatexCommand labelonly
33372 reference "fig:Two-images"
33378 \begin_inset Newline newline
33381 This allows for customization,
33382 using \SpecialChar TeX
33384 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
33391 then you may want to use the
33394 \begin_inset space ~
33400 which will output only the part of the reference following the
33401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33409 This is the form needed for e.
33410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33414 \begin_inset space \space{}
33421 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33423 The varieties are adjusted in the field
33427 of the cross-reference window,
33428 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
33431 \begin_layout Standard
33432 You can only use the style
33436 to reference numbered document parts,
33437 while the reference style
33441 is always possible.
33444 \begin_layout Standard
33445 If you want to reference a section,
33446 put the label in the section heading;
33447 for floats put the label in the caption;
33448 for footnotes put the label in it.
33449 Referencing formulas is explained in section
33450 \begin_inset space ~
33454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33456 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
33464 \begin_layout Standard
33465 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
33469 \begin_inset space ~
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33478 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
33479 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33480 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label.)
33482 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
33485 \begin_inset space ~
33490 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
33491 You can also go back with the toolbar button
33494 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
33498 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
33503 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33504 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33513 You can change labels at any time.
33514 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
33515 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
33517 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
33518 change them all manually
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
33525 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
33526 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33530 References are described in detail in the section
33541 \begin_layout Section
33542 Table of Contents and other Listings
33543 \begin_inset Index idx
33548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33555 \begin_inset Index idx
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33577 \begin_inset Index idx
33582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33598 \begin_layout Subsection
33600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33602 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
33609 \begin_layout Standard
33610 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
33612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33625 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
33627 If you click on it,
33633 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
33634 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
33635 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
33637 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33644 that is described in section
33645 \begin_inset space ~
33649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33651 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
33659 \begin_layout Standard
33660 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
33661 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
33662 as described in section
33663 \begin_inset space ~
33667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33669 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
33675 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
33677 \begin_inset space ~
33681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33683 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
33688 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
33689 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
33692 \begin_layout Subsection
33695 Listings and Algorithms
33696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33698 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
33705 \begin_layout Standard
33708 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
33709 You can insert them via the
33711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33712 List/Contents/References
33715 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
33718 \begin_layout Section
33719 URLs and Hyperlinks
33720 \begin_inset Index idx
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33732 \begin_inset Index idx
33737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33746 \begin_layout Subsection
33748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
33760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 \begin_layout Standard
33767 Here is an example URL:
33771 \begin_inset Flex URL
33774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33776 https://www.lyx.org
33784 \begin_layout Standard
33785 You cannot change the style of the link text,
33786 the URL text will always be in the style
33791 To be able to format the URL text,
33792 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
33795 \begin_layout Standard
33796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33805 URLs must not end with a backslash,
33806 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33815 \begin_layout Subsection
33817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33819 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
33826 \begin_layout Standard
33827 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
33829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33832 or with the toolbar button
33839 The appearing dialog has two fields:
33849 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
33850 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
33852 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33854 name "LyX's homepage"
33855 target "https://www.lyx.org"
33861 an Email address like this:
33863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33865 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
33866 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
33874 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
33878 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
33879 or any other valid URI (such as
33890 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33898 \begin_layout Standard
33899 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
33900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33912 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
33914 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
33919 \begin_layout Standard
33920 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
33921 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
33922 To set the format of the link text,
33923 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
33924 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
33929 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33931 name "LyX's homepage"
33932 target "https://www.lyx.org"
33940 \begin_layout Standard
33941 The link text color can be changed,
33946 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
33948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33949 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33953 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
33954 \begin_inset Newline newline
33962 \begin_inset Newline newline
33969 in the PDF Properties dialog.
33970 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
33974 \begin_layout Section
33976 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
33978 \begin_inset Index idx
33983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33992 name "sec:Counters"
33999 \begin_layout Standard
34001 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34002 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34003 is its ability to manage counters.
34005 this is handled automatically,
34006 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
34007 This can be done in
34008 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
34010 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
34013 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34014 using the counter inset,
34015 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
34016 This allows one to set a counter's value;
34017 to reset it (to zero);
34021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34023 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
34024 Note that the section counter,
34026 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
34028 if you want the next section to be section five,
34030 then you need to set the section counter to four.
34037 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
34038 since the value added can be negative);
34040 to restore the saved value;
34041 and to print the value.
34042 These effects can also be limited to
34043 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
34045 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
34048 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34050 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
34052 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
34054 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
34057 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34061 \begin_layout Standard
34063 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
34064 There are five commands you can use:
34067 \begin_layout Enumerate
34069 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
34075 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
34078 \begin_layout Enumerate
34080 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
34086 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
34087 if you choose a negative number)
34090 \begin_layout Enumerate
34092 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
34098 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
34101 \begin_layout Enumerate
34103 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
34106 Save value of counter:
34109 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
34112 \begin_layout Enumerate
34114 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
34117 Restore value of counter:
34120 Restores the previously saved value.
34123 \begin_layout Standard
34125 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
34126 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
34131 \begin_layout Section
34133 \begin_inset Index idx
34138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34147 name "sec:Appendices"
34154 \begin_layout Standard
34155 Appendices are created with the menu
34157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34159 \begin_inset space ~
34163 \begin_inset space ~
34169 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
34170 This part is marked with a red borderline.
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
34175 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
34176 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
34177 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34183 \begin_inset space ~
34187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34189 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34205 reference "subsec:Export"
34213 \begin_layout Section
34215 \begin_inset Index idx
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34229 name "sec:Bibliography"
34236 \begin_layout Standard
34237 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
34239 You can include a bibliography database,
34240 which is explained in sec.
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34247 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34256 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
34257 using the paragraph environment
34262 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34269 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
34275 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
34276 such as author-year citations,
34277 and if you have more than a handful of references,
34278 then you should seriously consider
34282 using a bibliography database.
34285 \begin_layout Standard
34286 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
34287 we use two bibliographies in this document,
34292 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
34294 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
34296 the database approach relieves you,
34297 amongst other things,
34298 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
34301 \begin_layout Subsection
34302 The Bibliography Environment
34303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34305 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34318 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
34319 If you click on it,
34320 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
34329 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
34330 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
34331 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
34335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34340 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
34346 \begin_inset Newline newline
34350 \begin_inset Flex URL
34353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34355 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
34366 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34376 a short form of its title,
34378 \begin_inset Newline newline
34386 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
34391 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
34402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34405 or the toolbar button
34408 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
34412 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
34413 Select one or more keys from the list and
34423 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
34424 If you click on the box,
34425 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
34428 \begin_layout Standard
34429 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
34430 Here are two examples;
34431 the first without a label,
34432 the second with the label
34433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34447 Companion Second Edition
34451 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34453 key "latexcompanion"
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34462 The \SpecialChar LyX
34463 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
34465 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
34477 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34483 \begin_inset Index idx
34488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34491 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34508 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
34509 the label needs to be given the form
34510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34521 Author A and Author B(Year)
34522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34529 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34541 in the document settings
34542 \begin_inset Index idx
34547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34565 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34575 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
34584 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
34586 Once you have done that,
34590 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
34592 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
34595 dialog has three input fields instead of the
34614 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
34615 the second the year (without parentheses).
34616 These two are madatory.
34617 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
34623 ) and in abrreviated form (
34631 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
34632 add the abbreviated form to
34636 and the full list to the optional
34644 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
34645 If specified like this,
34648 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
34649 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
34652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34669 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
34673 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
34674 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
34675 In the bibliography entry,
34676 author and year must be added manually.
34681 \begin_layout Standard
34682 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
34684 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34694 arg "layout-paragraph"
34698 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
34701 \begin_layout Subsection
34702 Bibliography databases
34703 \begin_inset Index idx
34708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34710 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34727 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34734 \begin_layout Standard
34735 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34740 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
34741 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
34746 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
34747 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
34748 This database can be used for different documents,
34749 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
34750 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34754 The database is a text file with the file extension
34755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34767 containing the bibliography in a special format.
34768 The format is explained in
34769 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34776 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34780 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
34786 The file can be created using any text editor,
34787 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
34788 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
34790 \begin_inset Flex URL
34793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34795 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
34803 \begin_layout Standard
34805 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
34806 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34807 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
34808 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
34809 But it has its drawbacks,
34810 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
34811 Those are addressed by
34816 \begin_inset Index idx
34821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34839 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34840 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34853 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34854 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
34864 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
34867 \begin_layout Standard
34868 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34874 set in the document settings (menu
34876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34880 \begin_inset Index idx
34885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34887 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34913 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34922 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34924 \begin_inset Index idx
34929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34931 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34935 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34950 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34955 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34957 \begin_inset space ~
34963 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34971 Add bibliography to TOC
34973 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
34978 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
34980 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
34985 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
34986 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
34991 \begin_layout Standard
34992 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34993 style file is a text file with the file extension
34994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35005 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
35006 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35007 distribution should provide several of these,
35008 and many publishers provide their own style files,
35009 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
35010 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
35011 but this is something for experts.
35015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35016 For information on how this is done,
35018 \begin_inset Newline newline
35022 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35024 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
35034 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35040 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35044 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
35047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35049 \begin_inset Index idx
35054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35056 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35071 \begin_inset Index idx
35076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35079 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 \begin_layout Standard
35097 Accessing a database via
35101 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35104 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
35106 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
35111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35112 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35114 \begin_inset space ~
35120 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35121 you cannot select a
35126 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
35130 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35133 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
35135 note the following.
35140 \begin_layout Standard
35145 has two different style files:
35146 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
35147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35158 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
35159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35170 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
35171 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
35172 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35180 styles are not set in the
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35189 but in the document settings.
35190 \begin_inset Index idx
35195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35197 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35212 in the dialog in the
35217 which is only visible if you use
35222 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
35223 These options are described in detail in the
35229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35239 \begin_layout Standard
35240 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
35241 \begin_inset space ~
35245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35247 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35259 Bibliography Processors
35262 \begin_layout Standard
35263 To generate the bibliography from a database,
35265 uses a bibliography processor,
35266 that is an external program that reads the database,
35267 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
35268 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35270 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
35271 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35277 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
35278 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
35279 You can do this on a general level in
35281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35282 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35283 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35286 or for individual documents in
35288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35293 The following variants are available by default:
35296 \begin_layout Description
35299 \begin_inset Index idx
35304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35307 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35321 developed exclusively for
35325 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35331 provides full Unicode support,
35332 unlimited memory and many specific features
35342 it is strongly recommended to use
35349 \begin_layout Description
35350 bibtex the standard;
35351 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
35353 works with all bibliography packages,
35354 although it will probably fail with
35358 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
35361 \begin_layout Description
35362 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
35368 works with all bibliography packages,
35369 although more complex
35373 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
35378 features are supported.
35381 \begin_layout Standard
35382 By default (with the
35388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35403 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35404 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35409 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
35422 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35423 -based bibliography styles).
35424 This should suit most needs.
35427 \begin_layout Standard
35428 In Japanese documents,
35429 a specific processor is used.
35430 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
35431 (in \SpecialChar LyX
35437 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35438 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
35439 You can adjust it in
35441 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35442 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35443 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35449 \begin_layout Standard
35450 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
35451 Before adding options,
35452 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35459 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35469 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35473 \begin_layout Standard
35475 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
35476 These are explained in detail in section
35478 Customizing Bibliographies
35482 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35487 Additional Features
35490 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
35494 \begin_layout Subsection
35496 \begin_inset Index idx
35501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35503 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35520 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
35527 \begin_layout Standard
35528 Many different citation formats are common,
35530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35534 \begin_inset space \space{}
35537 numerical citation (as
35538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35545 like in this document),
35546 alpha-numerical citations (as
35547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35554 ) or author-year citations (as
35555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35564 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
35567 \begin_layout Standard
35568 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
35571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35576 \begin_inset Index idx
35581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35597 you have a range of other options,
35598 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
35603 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35623 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
35624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35626 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35634 \begin_layout Standard
35635 With a bibliography database (see
35636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35638 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35646 ) one has in contrary to the
35650 environment full access to the formatting styles.
35651 These style formats are available:
35654 \begin_layout Description
35656 \begin_inset space ~
35659 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35660 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
35663 \begin_layout Description
35664 Biblatex loads the package
35669 \begin_inset Index idx
35674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35691 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
35693 Biblatex citation style
35697 Biblatex bibliography style
35700 Options to the package
35704 can be entered in the
35711 \begin_layout Description
35713 \begin_inset space ~
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35720 mode) loads the package
35724 with the natbib compatibility mode.
35725 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
35736 behavior very closely.
35741 this option has some additional styles.
35746 styles are also supported by this variant.
35749 \begin_layout Description
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35754 (BibTeX) loads the package
35759 \begin_inset Index idx
35764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35767 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35781 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
35784 \begin_layout Description
35786 \begin_inset space ~
35789 (BibTeX) loads the package
35794 \begin_inset Index idx
35799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35802 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35816 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
35819 \begin_layout Standard
35828 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
35829 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
35839 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
35841 Whether the output uses numerical,
35842 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
35844 Biblatex citation style
35848 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
35849 a suitable style is proposed.
35856 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35860 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
35861 multiple style variants are available in the
35866 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
35867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35882 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
35883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35887 \begin_inset space \space{}
35891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35902 \begin_layout Standard
35903 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
35905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35909 \begin_inset space \space{}
35913 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
35914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35918 \begin_inset space \space{}
35922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35934 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35952 Here is a simple example where the text
35953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35957 \begin_inset space ~
35961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35964 appears after the reference:
35967 \begin_layout Quote
35969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35972 key "latexcompanion"
35980 \begin_layout Standard
35981 All styles except for
35985 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
35986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35994 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
35995 if the style requires this.
35998 \begin_layout Standard
35999 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
36000 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
36001 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
36002 the postnote will follow the last.
36007 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
36008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36011 qualified citation lists
36012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36018 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
36022 dialog will display three columns in the field
36030 \begin_inset space ~
36039 \begin_inset space ~
36047 \begin_inset space ~
36053 If you double-click on an item's
36056 \begin_inset space ~
36064 \begin_inset space ~
36070 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
36073 General text before
36079 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
36082 \begin_layout Subsection
36084 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
36085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36087 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
36091 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
36095 \begin_layout Standard
36097 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
36099 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36114 \begin_inset space ~
36117 Content\SpecialChar ldots
36120 context menu if specific conditions are met:
36123 \begin_layout Itemize
36125 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
36126 If citation entries include any of the fields
36127 \begin_inset Flex Code
36130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36132 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36141 \begin_inset Flex Code
36144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36154 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
36156 \begin_inset Flex Code
36159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36161 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36169 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
36174 \begin_inset Flex Code
36177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36179 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36188 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
36191 \begin_layout Itemize
36193 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36194 If citation entries include any of the fields
36195 \begin_inset Flex Code
36198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36200 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36208 (filled by JabRef) or
36209 \begin_inset Flex Code
36212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36214 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36222 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
36223 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
36224 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
36227 \begin_layout Standard
36229 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36230 In addition to that,
36232 also searches your disk for matching files if you enable
36234 Search drive for cited files
36238 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36239 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
36240 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36245 It uses the tokens supplied at
36249 in the same preferences section (by default:
36251 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
36252 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
36254 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
36256 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36257 of the file (at arbitrary position).
36259 opens the first matching file it finds.
36260 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
36261 the more systematic your file naming is,
36262 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
36263 the greater the chance this works for you.
36268 \begin_layout Standard
36270 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
36271 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
36272 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36274 \begin_inset Flex Code
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36279 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
36288 \begin_inset Flex Code
36291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36293 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
36302 but there are also special keys,
36303 which are documented in the
36305 Customization manual
36311 Cite format description
36318 \begin_layout Section
36320 \begin_inset Index idx
36325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36341 \begin_layout Standard
36342 An index entry is created if you use the menu
36344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36351 or the toolbar button
36358 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36366 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
36371 for some advanced methods)
36375 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36379 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
36381 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36385 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36390 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
36392 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36394 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
36397 the text that appears in the index
36398 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36399 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
36402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36409 index inset in the heading above for example)
36412 The word where the cursor is in
36413 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36417 or the currently highlighted text
36418 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36422 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
36424 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
36428 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36434 copied into the inset)
36439 \begin_layout Standard
36441 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
36442 (which prints out the index in your document)
36445 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
36446 in the document with
36447 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
36452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36453 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36461 A light blue box labeled
36462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36473 will show the place where the index
36474 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
36476 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
36480 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
36485 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
36488 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
36490 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
36493 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
36495 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
36497 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
36499 as there are no settings to make.
36500 This changes if you select
36501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36504 Use multiple indexes
36505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36509 \begin_inset space ~
36513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36515 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
36525 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
36526 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
36532 \begin_layout Standard
36534 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
36536 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
36538 you can customize index entries to look different.
36539 You can group index entries hierarchically,
36540 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
36541 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
36542 or additionally to,
36544 you can format the page reference (e.
36545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36549 make it bold for specific pages),
36550 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
36551 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
36553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36565 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
36570 \begin_layout Standard
36572 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
36573 give a short overview of
36574 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
36578 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
36579 these features in turn
36580 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
36583 in the next subsections.
36584 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36585 's index mechanism,
36586 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36590 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
36598 \begin_layout Subsection
36600 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
36601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36603 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
36609 Grouping Index Entries
36610 \begin_inset Index idx
36615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36617 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36634 \begin_layout Standard
36635 Index entries are often
36636 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
36639 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
36640 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
36641 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
36647 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36654 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36664 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
36665 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
36668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36669 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36679 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
36680 Maximally two such subentry insets,
36682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36686 three levels of grouping in total,
36687 are allowed per index entry.
36688 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
36689 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
36690 In the \SpecialChar LyX
36692 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
36697 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36706 \begin_layout Standard
36708 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
36710 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
36711 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
36712 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
36713 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
36714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36722 First we create the entry
36723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36737 reference "subsec:Lists"
36743 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36750 reference "sec:Itemize"
36756 we insert the command
36759 \begin_layout Standard
36761 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36769 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
36773 \begin_layout Standard
36775 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36783 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
36784 for the enumerated list in section
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36791 reference "sec:Enumerate"
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36803 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
36804 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36806 subentries are indicated by a preceding
36807 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
36811 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
36815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36823 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
36825 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
36827 although you have to take care that the character is not
36830 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
36833 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
36835 \begin_inset space ~
36839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36841 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
36847 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
36848 marks the grouping levels.
36852 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
36853 You can have three levels;
36854 every index level is indented a bit more.
36855 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
36856 If we don't have an index entry for
36857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36865 it will be printed anyway,
36866 but without a page number.
36871 \begin_layout Subsection
36873 \begin_inset Index idx
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36880 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36899 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
36901 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
36905 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
36906 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
36907 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
36908 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
36912 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
36914 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
36918 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
36919 index more pages under the same entry
36920 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
36921 refer to a page range instead,
36922 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
36923 one that marks the beginning of the range,
36924 the other that marks its end
36928 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
36929 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
36930 To mark start and end,
36931 select the respective
36935 option in the index inset settings dialog.
36936 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
36937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36957 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
36958 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
36959 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
36960 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36965 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36967 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
36968 we create an index entry in section
36969 \begin_inset space ~
36973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36975 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
36983 \begin_layout Standard
36985 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36988 Paragraph environments|(
36991 \begin_layout Standard
36993 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36994 and another entry at the end of section
36995 \begin_inset space ~
36999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37001 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
37009 \begin_layout Standard
37011 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37014 Paragraph environments|)
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37019 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37044 respectively start and end the index range.
37045 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
37046 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
37047 An example is the index entry
37048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37061 \begin_layout Subsection
37063 \begin_inset Index idx
37068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37070 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37087 \begin_layout Standard
37088 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
37089 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
37096 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
37097 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
37099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37111 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
37112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37124 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
37125 \begin_inset space ~
37129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37131 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37155 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
37156 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
37159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37160 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37166 \begin_layout Standard
37168 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
37169 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
37172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37173 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37185 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
37186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37206 \begin_layout Standard
37208 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37209 We referred for example in the index entry
37210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37224 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
37229 ) to the index entry
37230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37237 in the same section using the entry
37240 \begin_layout Standard
37242 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37245 GIF|see{Image formats}
37248 \begin_layout Standard
37250 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37251 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37253 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
37254 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
37259 \begin_layout Subsection
37261 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
37262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37264 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
37271 \begin_inset Index idx
37276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37295 \begin_layout Standard
37297 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
37298 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
37299 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
37304 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
37307 f you use accented characters in the index entry
37308 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
37309 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
37310 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
37311 or if you use macros
37314 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
37318 \begin_layout Standard
37320 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
37321 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
37326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37327 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37335 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
37345 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
37346 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
37347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37373 \begin_inset Index idx
37378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37380 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37395 \begin_inset Index idx
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37417 \begin_inset Index idx
37422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37429 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
37431 maison but we want the order maïs,
37438 \begin_layout Standard
37440 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
37443 previous entry@current entry
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37448 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
37449 In our case we want to have
37450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37465 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
37468 \begin_layout Standard
37470 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37478 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
37479 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
37480 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
37482 See the next subsection for an example.
37483 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37489 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
37490 To accommodate for that,
37493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37494 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
37499 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
37501 you can pass the sort key
37502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37513 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
37516 \begin_layout Standard
37518 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
37519 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37521 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
37522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37530 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
37532 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
37534 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
37536 \begin_inset space ~
37540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37542 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37552 \begin_layout Subsection
37554 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
37556 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
37560 \begin_inset Index idx
37565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37567 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37584 \begin_layout Standard
37586 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
37588 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
37591 he appearance of index entries
37592 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
37593 can be formatted as usual
37595 via the text style dialog
37596 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
37598 the toolbar or shortcuts.
37599 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
37602 \begin_inset Index idx
37607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37609 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37615 This is an italic dummy entry
37626 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
37627 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
37629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37642 will be listed separately.
37644 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
37646 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
37650 \begin_layout Standard
37652 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
37656 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
37658 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
37662 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
37668 option in the index entry settings dialog.
37670 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
37671 number using the character
37672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37679 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37680 -command without a backslash.
37681 We can write for example
37682 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
37683 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
37703 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
37710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37714 a self-defined command
37715 \begin_inset Flex Code
37718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37720 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
37728 or an existing macro such as
37729 \begin_inset Flex Code
37732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37734 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37749 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
37752 italic page number:|textit
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37757 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
37758 to get the page number in italic.
37759 \begin_inset Index idx
37764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37766 italic page number:|textit
37771 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
37772 -commands begin with a backslash,
37773 but in this special case
37774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37796 Have a look at section
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37803 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37808 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37814 \begin_layout Standard
37816 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
37817 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
37830 to generate the index,
37832 \begin_inset space ~
37836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37838 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
37849 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
37854 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
37856 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37859 key "latexcompanion"
37874 \begin_layout Standard
37876 we encourage you to
37877 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
37878 not format page numbers directly as shown above
37879 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
37880 use self-defined commands
37884 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
37885 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
37886 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
37888 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
37890 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
37891 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
37892 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
37895 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
37899 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
37900 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
37901 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
37902 definition of the indexed term,
37903 so that users can easily find definitions.
37905 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
37909 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
37912 the following in the preamble
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37921 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
37923 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
37929 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
37937 \begin_layout Standard
37939 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
37941 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
37942 add the custom formatting
37943 \begin_inset Flex Code
37946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
37956 to the respective entry settings dialog.
37961 \begin_layout Standard
37963 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
37969 \begin_layout Standard
37971 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
37972 in the index entry.
37973 \begin_inset Index idx
37978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37985 The advantage is that,
37987 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
37988 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
37991 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
37992 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
37993 not every single index entry.
37994 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
37998 \begin_layout Standard
38000 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38006 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
38012 If you use the index processor
38018 makeindex or xindex
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38027 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38033 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
38038 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
38039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38046 (style file) you use before they can be used.
38048 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
38051 \begin_layout Verbatim
38053 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
38055 (markup-locref :open "
38057 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
38060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38062 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
38064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38067 key "latexcompanion"
38082 \begin_layout Standard
38083 You can also change the layout
38084 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
38086 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
38092 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
38094 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
38098 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
38102 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
38106 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
38109 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
38112 get a bold font for all index entries.
38114 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
38117 it is better (and required for
38118 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
38121 more advanced tasks
38122 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
38126 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
38129 to set up a so-called
38132 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
38156 ) to determine the formatting;
38157 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
38162 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
38164 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
38170 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
38177 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
38185 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
38193 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
38198 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
38200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38202 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
38208 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
38210 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38212 key "makeindex,xindy"
38221 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
38222 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
38223 packages available that ease such formatting,
38225 \begin_inset Flex URL
38228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38230 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
38232 https://ctan.org/topic/index
38242 \begin_layout Subsection
38244 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
38245 Special Characters in Index Entries
38246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38248 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38255 \begin_layout Standard
38257 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
38258 As already mentioned above,
38259 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
38262 \begin_inset Flex Code
38265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38267 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
38277 \begin_inset Flex Code
38280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
38292 \begin_inset Flex Code
38295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38297 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
38298 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38310 \begin_inset Flex Code
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38315 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
38324 If you use them literally,
38325 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
38327 you will not get the character itself.
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38332 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
38333 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
38335 \begin_inset Quotes els
38339 \begin_inset Quotes ers
38343 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
38345 the escape character is
38346 \begin_inset Flex Code
38349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38351 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
38352 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38362 (but this can be changed).
38364 \begin_inset Flex Code
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38369 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
38370 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38382 \begin_inset Flex Code
38385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38387 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
38388 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38400 \begin_inset Flex Code
38403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
38406 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38410 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
38422 \begin_inset Flex Code
38425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
38428 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38438 to get the special character you want.
38439 Note that the escape character,
38441 \begin_inset Flex Code
38444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
38447 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38462 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38469 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38479 \begin_layout Subsection
38481 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
38482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38484 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
38488 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
38491 \begin_layout Standard
38493 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
38494 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
38495 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
38496 This is not only time-consuming,
38497 but also error-prone;
38499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38503 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
38505 provides some functions to ease the task.
38508 \begin_layout Standard
38510 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
38512 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
38513 you can open the outliner via
38515 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38519 \begin_inset space ~
38523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38525 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
38535 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
38536 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
38541 it will be more easier),
38546 -click on the entry and select
38548 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
38550 from the context menu.
38551 This will do just what it says:
38552 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
38555 \begin_layout Standard
38557 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
38560 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
38561 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
38562 you can select from the context menu
38564 Index All Occurrences of this Word
38567 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
38568 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
38569 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
38570 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
38574 is the word before the index entry,
38579 will be considered as well,
38585 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
38587 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
38588 but only relevant occurrences!
38589 So as convenient as this function might seem,
38590 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
38592 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
38595 \begin_layout Subsection
38597 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
38599 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
38603 \begin_inset Index idx
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38627 name "subsec:Index-Program"
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38636 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
38638 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
38645 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
38654 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
38662 for index generation;
38663 otherwise the program
38668 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
38671 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38678 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
38684 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
38685 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
38686 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
38687 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
38689 if you are writing in another than the English language,
38704 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
38705 As a further option,
38706 you can select the rather new
38713 \begin_layout Itemize
38715 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
38721 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
38722 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
38723 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
38725 \begin_inset space ~
38729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38731 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38737 how to manually fix this sorting,
38738 but this is very tedious work).
38741 \begin_layout Itemize
38743 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
38744 The alternative program,
38750 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
38751 It can sort most languages correctly,
38752 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
38758 is no longer actively maintained,
38759 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
38765 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
38766 But if you have it available,
38767 it is almost always a better option than
38774 \begin_layout Itemize
38776 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
38783 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
38784 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
38785 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
38786 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
38788 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
38789 The program is still in development,
38790 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
38791 But the program is definitely worth a try,
38796 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
38801 \begin_layout Standard
38803 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
38805 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
38809 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
38811 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
38814 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
38815 's preferences dialog,
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38823 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
38829 The available options are listed and explained in
38830 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
38832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38834 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
38840 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
38842 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38844 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
38854 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
38856 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
38860 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
38862 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
38865 alternative program
38866 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
38869 to generate the index.
38872 \begin_layout Standard
38873 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
38874 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
38877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38882 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
38885 \begin_layout Subsection
38887 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
38888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38890 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
38899 \begin_layout Standard
38900 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
38902 you might need to set up a separate
38903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38910 next to the standard index.
38912 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
38913 but there are packages that add this feature.
38920 \begin_inset Index idx
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38928 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 package to generate multiple indexes.
38943 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
38948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 If yours does not ship it,
38950 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
38953 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38961 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38963 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
38964 Please consult the package's manual for details.
38972 \begin_layout Standard
38973 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
38974 for the use of multiple indexes,
38977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38978 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38981 and select the option
38983 Use multiple Indexes
38990 already contains the standard index
38991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38999 To add further indexes,
39000 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
39004 input field and press the
39009 The new index now also appears in the list.
39011 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
39012 label color to the new index.
39015 \begin_layout Standard
39016 Once the document changes have been applied,
39017 you can find the new index list in
39019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39020 List/Contents/References
39026 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
39027 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
39028 but there are additional features:
39031 \begin_layout Itemize
39032 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
39033 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
39036 \begin_layout Itemize
39037 By right-clicking on an index,
39038 you can change its type.
39040 you can specify an index to be a
39046 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
39048 if you use a book class,
39049 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
39050 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
39053 \begin_layout Itemize
39058 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
39059 code in the name of the index.
39062 \begin_layout Section
39063 Nomenclature/Glossary
39064 \begin_inset Index idx
39069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 \begin_inset Index idx
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39083 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
39086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39100 name "sec:Nomenclature"
39107 \begin_layout Standard
39108 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
39111 \begin_layout Standard
39112 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
39113 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39119 \begin_inset Index idx
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39127 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39145 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39152 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39156 \begin_layout Standard
39157 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
39159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39170 or the toolbar button
39173 arg "nomencl-insert"
39178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39189 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
39192 \begin_layout Standard
39193 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
39194 The first is the term or
39198 that you wish to define.
39203 of the term or symbol.
39206 \begin_layout Standard
39207 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 To use \SpecialChar TeX
39217 code for nomenclature entries the option
39221 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
39229 \begin_layout Subsection
39230 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
39231 \begin_inset Index idx
39236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39255 \begin_layout Standard
39256 If you have symbols in formulas,
39257 you have to define them in the
39261 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39268 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39277 \begin_inset Newline newline
39285 \begin_inset Newline newline
39291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39298 character starts/ends the formula.
39299 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
39300 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
39301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39311 For capital Greek letters,
39312 start the command also with a capital letter,
39322 \begin_layout Standard
39323 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39324 syntax is given in section
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39331 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39343 \begin_inset space ~
39348 dialog to format the description text;
39349 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
39351 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
39352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39356 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39363 in this document is:
39364 \begin_inset Newline newline
39369 dummy entry for the character
39374 \begin_inset Newline newline
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39396 font use the command
39427 \begin_layout Standard
39428 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
39429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39433 \begin_inset space \space{}
39437 \begin_inset Newline newline
39453 \begin_inset Newline newline
39456 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
39457 This command will make the font of all symbols
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 If the characters |
39474 \begin_inset space \space{}
39478 \begin_inset space \space{}
39482 \begin_inset space \space{}
39487 \begin_inset space \space{}
39491 \begin_inset space \space{}
39494 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
39495 code they need to be escaped by adding a
39496 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
39498 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
39501 character in front of them.
39502 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
39504 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
39505 LatexCommand nomenclature
39506 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
39507 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
39513 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
39515 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
39516 LatexCommand nomenclature
39517 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
39518 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
39528 \begin_layout Subsection
39529 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
39530 \begin_inset Index idx
39535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39554 \begin_layout Standard
39555 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39556 -code of the symbol definition.
39557 This leads to undesired results when you,
39559 have symbols in formulas.
39560 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
39563 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
39564 LatexCommand nomenclature
39566 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
39574 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39578 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
39579 LatexCommand nomenclature
39582 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
39588 They will be sorted by
39589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39615 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39618 will be sorted before the
39622 since the character
39623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39630 is considered in sorting.
39633 \begin_layout Standard
39634 To control the sort order,
39638 \begin_inset space ~
39643 field of the nomenclature dialog.
39644 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
39645 For the example given,
39650 in this field for the
39651 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39659 will be located before
39660 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39666 \begin_layout Standard
39667 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
39673 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39683 \begin_layout Subsection
39684 Nomenclature Options
39685 \begin_inset Index idx
39690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39692 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39709 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
39716 \begin_layout Standard
39721 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
39722 Here are some of its options;
39723 for more have a look at its documentation:
39726 \begin_layout Description
39727 refeq Appends the phrase
39728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39744 to every nomenclature entry,
39751 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
39754 \begin_layout Description
39755 refpage Appends the phrase
39756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39772 to every nomenclature entry,
39779 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
39782 \begin_layout Description
39783 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
39786 \begin_layout Standard
39787 To use one or more of the options,
39788 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
39790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39794 In this document the options
39802 \begin_layout Standard
39803 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
39809 \begin_layout Standard
39810 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
39814 field in the nomenclature dialog:
39817 \begin_layout Description
39827 \begin_layout Description
39830 nomrefpage Like the
39837 \begin_layout Description
39840 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
39849 \begin_layout Description
39853 \begin_inset space ~
39859 \begin_inset space ~
39864 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39876 are automatically translated for most document languages.
39878 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
39882 \begin_layout Standard
39891 \begin_inset Newline newline
39897 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
39900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39917 \begin_inset Newline newline
39924 pagedeclaration}[1]{
39925 \begin_inset Newline newline
39931 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
39934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39953 \begin_layout Standard
39954 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
39955 assure that you use
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39963 in the document settings under
39966 \begin_inset space ~
39974 \begin_layout Standard
39982 \begin_inset Newline newline
39986 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 \begin_inset space ~
40003 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
40005 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
40006 \begin_inset Newline newline
40013 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40014 \begin_inset Newline newline
40018 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40035 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
40040 \begin_layout Subsection
40041 Printing the Nomenclature
40042 \begin_inset Index idx
40047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40066 \begin_layout Standard
40067 To print the nomenclature,
40070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40071 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
40076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40087 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
40088 By right-clicking on it,
40089 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
40090 You can choose between these settings:
40093 \begin_layout Description
40094 Default a space of 1
40095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40101 \begin_layout Description
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40110 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
40113 \begin_layout Description
40114 Custom custom space
40117 \begin_layout Standard
40118 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
40119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40127 If you are not happy with the name,
40128 you can change it by redefining the command
40136 in order to change the name to
40141 add the following line to the preamble:
40144 \begin_layout Standard
40157 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
40160 \begin_layout Standard
40161 When you are using another document language than English,
40163 \begin_inset Newline newline
40179 where *** is the name of the language used.
40182 \begin_layout Subsection
40183 Nomenclature Program
40184 \begin_inset Index idx
40189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40191 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40208 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40222 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
40224 to generate the nomenclature.
40226 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40238 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
40244 The available options are listed and explained in
40245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40247 key "nomencl,makeindex"
40255 \begin_layout Section
40257 \begin_inset Index idx
40262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40269 \begin_inset Index idx
40274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40276 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40293 name "sec:Branches"
40300 \begin_layout Standard
40301 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
40302 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
40303 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
40308 allows you to put text into branches.
40309 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
40310 To create a branch,
40311 either select the menu
40313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40314 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
40317 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
40319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40327 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
40328 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
40329 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
40330 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
40332 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
40333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40348 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
40349 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
40352 \begin_layout Standard
40353 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
40354 These boxes are inserted via the menu
40356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40359 where you can choose a branch.
40360 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
40363 \begin_layout Standard
40364 Here is an example,
40365 where only the question text appears,
40366 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
40369 \begin_layout Standard
40370 \begin_inset Branch Question
40374 \begin_layout Standard
40380 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
40388 \begin_layout Standard
40389 \begin_inset Branch Answer
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40399 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
40407 \begin_layout Standard
40414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40415 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40419 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
40420 Consider for example a file
40421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40428 which has the above branches.
40430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40438 the PDF export file would be called
40439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40462 branch were inactive,
40464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40501 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
40502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40505 if both branches were active.
40506 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
40507 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40513 \begin_layout Standard
40515 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
40516 It is also possible to
40517 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
40521 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
40523 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
40527 whose content is output just in case the branch is
40532 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
40533 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
40537 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
40539 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
40542 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
40543 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
40544 right-click on the inset button and choose
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40555 \begin_layout Standard
40556 \begin_inset Branch Answer
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40574 branch is deactivated.
40580 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40586 \begin_layout Standard
40587 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
40588 like inside equations,
40589 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
40590 definitions for each branch.
40591 For example you can define for the question branch
40595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40596 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40605 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40628 \begin_layout Standard
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40639 and for the answer branch
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40652 \begin_layout Standard
40662 \begin_layout Standard
40663 \begin_inset Branch Question
40667 \begin_layout Standard
40671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40700 \begin_inset Branch Answer
40704 \begin_layout Standard
40708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40737 Now it is possible to use the
40741 question{\SpecialChar ldots
40748 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
40751 commands to obtain conditional output.
40752 Here is an example formula where only the
40759 \begin_inset Formula
40761 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
40769 \begin_layout Standard
40771 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
40779 \begin_layout Standard
40780 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
40781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40785 \begin_inset space \space{}
40788 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
40790 For this advanced usage,
40798 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40801 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
40805 \begin_layout Standard
40807 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
40808 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close status of all branch insets in the document we provide
40814 which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined context menu of branch inset.
40819 \begin_layout Section
40821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40823 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
40828 \begin_inset Index idx
40833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40842 \begin_layout Standard
40844 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
40849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40850 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40854 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
40857 allows you to set up
40858 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
40860 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
40864 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
40866 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
40870 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
40874 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
40879 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
40881 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
40885 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
40887 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
40890 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40892 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
40894 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
40902 \begin_inset Index idx
40907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40910 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40925 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
40926 which you need to enable by clicking
40928 Use Hyperref Support
40930 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
40931 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
40933 Customize Hyperref Options
40936 Among other things,
40938 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
40942 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
40944 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
40948 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
40952 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
40955 cross-references in the
40956 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
40960 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
40962 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
40966 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
40967 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
40971 table of contents entry or on a reference to
40972 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
40973 open a website or to
40975 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
40977 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
40979 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
40980 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
40985 \begin_layout Standard
40986 The header information in the dialog tab
40990 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
40991 Many programs are able to extract this information,
40994 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
40997 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
40998 This is very useful to sort,
40999 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
41017 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
41020 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41037 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
41038 which is useful for presentations.
41041 \begin_layout Standard
41043 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
41045 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
41053 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
41054 you can customize the
41055 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
41057 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
41061 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
41063 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
41067 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
41069 and you can specify
41072 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
41074 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
41075 will look and if links for
41077 bibliographical backreferences are created
41078 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
41084 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
41085 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41104 option allows long links to be split;
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41129 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41138 colors the different links.
41139 The default colors are:
41142 \begin_layout Labeling
41143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41148 for hyperlinks and URLs
41151 \begin_layout Labeling
41152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41160 \begin_layout Labeling
41161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41169 \begin_layout Standard
41170 but you can change these in the
41171 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
41173 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
41179 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
41181 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
41188 in this document they were changed with the
41189 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
41193 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
41203 \begin_layout Quote
41212 \begin_layout Standard
41214 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
41220 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
41222 depending on the option selected,
41223 the number of the section,
41224 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
41229 \begin_layout Standard
41234 you can specify if PDF
41235 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
41237 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
41241 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
41242 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
41244 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
41245 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
41247 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
41249 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
41253 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
41259 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
41261 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
41263 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
41266 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
41274 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
41275 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
41276 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
41277 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41284 2 will display all sections and subsections,
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 1 will only display the sections
41290 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
41291 (collapsing the rest)
41294 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
41298 \begin_layout Standard
41300 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
41305 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
41306 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41313 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
41314 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
41315 \begin_inset Flex Code
41318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41320 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
41331 not via the package options.
41332 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
41333 If you need to use one of those options,
41334 you can set them by adding
41337 \begin_layout Quote
41339 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
41342 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
41343 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
41345 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
41351 \begin_layout Standard
41353 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
41356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41360 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
41365 \begin_layout Standard
41367 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
41372 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
41374 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
41375 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
41376 input is simply ignored).
41377 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
41383 At the point of writing this,
41384 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
41386 documentmetadata-support.pdf
41389 but it is expected that in the future,
41390 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
41393 \begin_layout Standard
41395 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
41396 PDF properties are also used in this document.
41397 When you look in its document settings,
41398 you can see that some additional
41403 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
41404 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41416 \begin_layout Section
41418 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41422 name "sec:TeX-Code"
41429 \begin_layout Subsection
41432 \begin_inset Index idx
41437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41447 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41454 \begin_layout Standard
41455 As \SpecialChar LyX
41456 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
41458 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
41459 commands and constructs,
41462 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
41463 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
41464 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41465 -package for every problem,
41466 though \SpecialChar LyX
41467 cannot support all packages and their commands.
41470 \begin_layout Standard
41472 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
41473 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
41474 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
41477 Code box is created by the menu
41479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41486 or by the toolbar button
41499 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
41506 \begin_layout Standard
41507 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
41509 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
41512 if you want to draw a frame around a word
41516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41517 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
41522 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41530 you can write the command part
41536 in a \SpecialChar TeX
41537 Code box before the word and the closing brace
41541 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
41542 Code box behind the word.
41543 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
41544 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41548 \begin_inset Graphics
41549 filename clipart/ERT.png
41557 \begin_layout Standard
41561 \begin_layout Standard
41562 This is a line with a
41566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 \begin_layout Standard
41590 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41599 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41600 -commands without parameters,
41601 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
41602 know that the command is finished.
41610 \begin_layout Subsection
41611 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41613 \begin_inset Argument 1
41616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41617 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
41624 \begin_inset Index idx
41629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41639 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41646 \begin_layout Standard
41647 When you write larger documents or books,
41648 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41649 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
41650 uses in the background.
41651 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
41652 is based on commands,
41654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41662 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
41664 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
41665 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
41666 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
41667 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
41670 \begin_layout Standard
41671 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
41673 As mentioned above,
41674 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41676 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41679 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41689 \begin_layout Standard
41690 As result you find that the package
41695 \begin_inset Index idx
41700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41719 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
41721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41724 \SpecialChar menuseparator
41728 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_layout Standard
41741 usepackage[options]{package name}
41744 \begin_layout Standard
41745 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
41746 commands begin with a backslash,
41747 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
41748 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
41751 \begin_layout Standard
41752 In your case the package name is
41757 After a look in the documentation of the package,
41758 you know that the option
41762 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
41763 So you add the command
41766 \begin_layout Standard
41771 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
41774 \begin_layout Standard
41775 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
41779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41780 For more commands provided by the
41785 have a look at its documentation,
41787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41802 \begin_layout Standard
41803 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
41804 For example if you use a
41809 you don't need the package
41814 you can instead write
41817 \begin_layout Standard
41822 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
41827 \begin_layout Standard
41828 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
41829 So if you plan to write a large document,
41830 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
41837 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
41840 \begin_layout Standard
41841 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
41842 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
41843 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41845 use the \SpecialChar TeX
41846 Code box as described in the previous section.
41849 \begin_layout Standard
41850 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
41852 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41854 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41856 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
41864 \begin_layout Standard
41865 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
41871 \begin_layout Standard
41875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 \begin_inset Note Note
41888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41889 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
41897 \begin_layout Left Header
41898 \begin_inset Argument 1
41901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41921 \begin_inset Note Note
41924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41925 defines the header line as described below
41933 \begin_layout Center Header
41934 \begin_inset Argument 1
41937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41946 \begin_layout Right Header
41947 \begin_inset Argument 1
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41971 \begin_layout Left Footer
41972 \begin_inset Argument 1
41975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41996 \begin_layout Center Footer
41997 \begin_inset Argument 1
42000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42012 \begin_inset Newline newline
42016 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
42022 \begin_layout Right Footer
42023 \begin_inset Argument 1
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42048 \begin_layout Section
42049 Customized Page Headers and Footers
42050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42052 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
42057 \begin_inset Index idx
42062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42079 \begin_inset Index idx
42084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42093 \begin_layout Standard
42094 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
42095 you need to set the
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42121 As a second step add in the menu
42123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42124 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42133 Custom Header/Footerlines
42136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42140 This module offers the following 6
42141 \begin_inset space ~
42147 \begin_layout Description
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42165 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_layout Description
42173 \begin_inset space ~
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42181 \begin_inset space ~
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_inset space ~
42195 \begin_layout Standard
42196 for the different positions in the header/footer.
42197 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
42200 \begin_layout Standard
42202 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
42203 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42211 reference "fig:Page-layout"
42216 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
42219 \begin_layout Standard
42220 \begin_inset Float figure
42227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42230 \begin_inset Tabular
42231 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
42232 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
42233 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42234 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42235 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
42249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42255 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42295 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
42298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42299 The normal text on the page goes here.
42300 The running header is above the text,
42301 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
42302 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
42303 title of the chapter,
42304 company logo but you can use almost anything,
42310 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42319 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42348 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
42371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42377 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 \begin_inset Caption Standard
42397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42400 name "fig:Page-layout"
42404 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
42417 \begin_layout Standard
42418 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42435 is set to “Default”.
42436 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
42444 \begin_layout Subsection
42448 \begin_layout Standard
42449 To define your header line,
42450 add all three header environments.
42451 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
42452 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
42453 For single-sided documents,
42454 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
42455 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
42456 nothing appears in the output.
42457 Defining the footer line works similarly.
42460 \begin_layout Standard
42461 For the definition,
42462 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
42463 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
42466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42468 \begin_inset space ~
42476 \begin_layout Description
42479 thepage prints the current page number
42482 \begin_layout Description
42485 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
42488 \begin_layout Description
42491 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
42494 \begin_layout Description
42497 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
42498 If the document has chapters,
42499 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
42501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42505 \begin_inset Quotes prd
42508 because it usually goes in a left header.
42511 \begin_layout Description
42514 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
42515 If the document has chapters,
42516 it prints the current section number and title instead.
42517 It is normally used in the right header.
42520 \begin_layout Subsection
42521 Default header/footer
42524 \begin_layout Standard
42525 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
42526 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
42527 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
42528 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
42529 but leave it blank.
42531 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42543 \begin_layout Subsection
42547 \begin_layout Standard
42548 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
42549 Some pages are different.
42550 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
42551 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
42552 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
42553 but that is normal.
42554 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
42557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42558 Header and footer decoration line
42561 \begin_layout Standard
42564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42567 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
42568 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
42580 in the following way:
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42590 headrulewidth}{thickness}
42593 \begin_layout Standard
42594 where thickness is a size in standard units like
42607 If you don't want a line,
42608 set the thickness to 0
42609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42615 \begin_layout Standard
42616 The lines can also be colored,
42617 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42619 If you really need this,
42620 have a look at the Internet or in section
42621 \begin_inset space ~
42625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42636 Several header/footer lines
42639 \begin_layout Standard
42640 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
42641 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
42643 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
42644 To expand the height,
42645 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42678 headheight}{height}
42681 \begin_layout Standard
42686 is a size in standard units (e.
42687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42691 \begin_inset space \space{}
42699 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
42700 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
42701 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42702 logfile with the menu
42704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42714 \begin_inset space ~
42719 to see if you can find a warning about the package
42724 \begin_inset Index idx
42729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42732 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42747 If there is such a warning,
42748 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
42751 \begin_layout Subsection
42755 \begin_layout Standard
42756 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
42757 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
42758 This example consists of the following definition:
42761 \begin_layout Description
42763 \begin_inset space ~
42773 empty optional argument
42776 \begin_layout Description
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42782 empty optional argument
42785 \begin_layout Description
42787 \begin_inset space ~
42797 in the optional argument
42800 \begin_layout Description
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42812 in the optional argument
42815 \begin_layout Description
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42835 \begin_inset Newline newline
42839 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
42843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42846 in the optional argument
42849 \begin_layout Description
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42861 empty optional argument
42864 \begin_layout Description
42867 headrulewidth set to 2
42868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42874 \begin_layout Standard
42875 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
42877 For more specialized features,
42880 see the manual of the
42886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42911 pagestyle{headings}
42917 \begin_inset Note Note
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42921 switches back to page style with the default headings
42929 \begin_layout Section
42930 Previewing Snippets of your Document
42931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42933 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42938 \begin_inset Index idx
42943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42950 \begin_inset Index idx
42955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42957 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42974 \begin_layout Standard
42976 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
42979 \begin_layout Subsection
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 To get previews working,
42985 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42991 \begin_inset Index idx
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42999 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43013 (on some systems named simply
43018 If it is not already installed,
43019 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
43022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43029 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43031 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
43040 for \SpecialChar LyX
43041 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43042 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
43046 \begin_layout Subsection
43050 \begin_layout Standard
43051 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43052 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43054 activate the option
43057 \begin_inset space ~
43064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43070 \begin_inset space ~
43074 \begin_inset space ~
43077 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
43084 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43102 is the multiplication factor for the size.
43105 \begin_layout Standard
43106 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43127 \begin_layout Standard
43128 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
43129 and when you finish editing an inset.
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43142 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43151 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
43159 \begin_layout Subsection
43160 Selected document parts
43163 \begin_layout Standard
43164 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
43165 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
43166 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43169 insert a preview inset via the menu
43171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43175 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
43176 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
43177 If you click on the preview,
43178 you can edit the previewed stuff.
43181 \begin_layout Standard
43183 To create rotated boxes,
43184 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43191 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43203 is explained in section
43205 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
43210 \begin_inset space ~
43220 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
43221 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43222 the final rotated boxes,
43223 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
43224 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
43225 Here is the result:
43228 \begin_layout Standard
43229 \begin_inset Preview
43231 \begin_layout Standard
43236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43240 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
43246 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
43256 height_special "totalheight"
43261 backgroundcolor "none"
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43289 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
43295 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
43302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43317 \begin_layout Standard
43318 Previewing works also for colors.
43319 In this example a special framed,
43320 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43338 is explained in section
43345 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 \begin_inset Preview
43361 \begin_layout Standard
43365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43384 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
43389 This is text within a colored,
43394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43410 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43416 \begin_layout Standard
43417 If \SpecialChar LyX
43418 does not show a preview,
43419 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
43420 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43421 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
43423 If \SpecialChar LyX
43424 cannot create a preview,
43425 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43427 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
43428 Code and don't know if it is correct,
43429 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
43432 \begin_layout Subsection
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43438 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43439 source of the whole document or parts of it.
43442 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43449 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43451 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
43452 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
43454 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
43455 To view the whole document as source,
43456 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
43462 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
43464 but note that if you have several documents open,
43465 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
43467 not just the one which is open at the time.
43470 \begin_layout Section
43471 Advanced Find and Replace
43472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43474 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
43479 \begin_inset Index idx
43484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 \begin_inset Index idx
43496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43505 \begin_layout Subsection
43509 \begin_layout Standard
43510 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
43511 allows for searching of complex,
43512 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
43514 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
43515 The key-features are:
43518 \begin_layout Itemize
43519 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
43520 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
43521 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
43522 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
43525 \begin_layout Itemize
43526 Search may be format-insensitive,
43527 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
43530 and even mathematics),
43531 or it may be format-sensitive,
43534 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
43537 \begin_layout Itemize
43538 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
43539 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
43542 \begin_layout Itemize
43543 Search may be widened to a specific
43549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43556 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
43557 all the open files,
43558 or all the manuals available from the
43565 \begin_layout Itemize
43566 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
43567 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
43568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43577 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
43580 \begin_layout Subsection
43584 \begin_layout Standard
43585 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
43587 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43600 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
43603 ) or the toolbar button
43606 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43612 Advanced Find and Replace
43617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43621 \begin_layout Standard
43627 mini-editor a simple word,
43628 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43636 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
43639 arg "paragraph-break"
43643 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
43645 bold or normal face,
43646 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
43650 arg "paragraph-break"
43653 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
43657 searches backwards.
43660 \begin_layout Standard
43664 \begin_inset space ~
43669 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43682 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
43685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43686 Searching for mathematics
43689 \begin_layout Standard
43690 Mathematical formulas,
43692 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
43695 or something more complex like
43696 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
43700 may be searched for by typing them in the
43705 When searching for a formula,
43706 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
43707 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
43708 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
43714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43719 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
43720 This is done by switching to the
43724 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
43737 \begin_layout Itemize
43738 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
43741 \begin_layout Itemize
43742 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
43743 and within the same text style only.
43746 \begin_layout Itemize
43747 a normal word in a section heading,
43748 and searching for it,
43749 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
43751 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
43752 in addition to a section style,
43753 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
43756 \begin_layout Itemize
43757 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
43760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 The entries made in the
43769 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43778 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
43783 button or alternatively press
43786 arg "paragraph-break"
43793 while the cursor is in the
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_layout Standard
43805 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
43807 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
43810 \begin_layout Itemize
43811 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
43812 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
43813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43820 with its typewriter version
43821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43835 \begin_layout Itemize
43836 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
43837 for example replacing occurrences of
43838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43842 \begin_inset Formula $R$
43846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
43858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43861 (you may want to enable the
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43877 options and disable the
43886 in order to avoid replacing all
43887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43894 letters occurring in normal text),
43896 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
43900 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
43905 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
43909 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
43915 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43919 \begin_layout Standard
43920 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
43924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43925 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
43927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43929 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
43939 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
43944 This is done with the context menu
43946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43947 Insert Regular Expression
43949 while the cursor is in the
43954 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
43958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
43962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43966 \begin_inset space ~
43969 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
43971 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
43977 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
43978 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
43979 Examples of using such a feature may be:
43982 \begin_layout Enumerate
43983 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
43989 editor the fraction
43990 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
43994 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
43997 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
44000 \begin_layout Enumerate
44001 Searching for all text with a given style:
44004 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
44008 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
44011 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
44012 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
44018 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44019 and the 'Select all'
44029 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44034 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
44035 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
44038 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44041 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
44042 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
44044 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
44045 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
44049 \begin_layout Description
44051 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
44052 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44062 color colored text like cyan,
44067 \begin_layout Description
44069 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44079 \begin_layout Description
44081 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_layout Description
44092 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44103 \begin_layout Description
44105 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_layout Description
44118 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
44119 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
44124 \begin_layout Description
44126 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
44133 \begin_layout Description
44135 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
44136 Strike-through Single,
44140 \begin_layout Description
44142 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
44143 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
44146 \begin_layout Description
44148 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44163 \begin_layout Standard
44165 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
44166 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
44167 \begin_inset Formula $()$
44171 and referring back to them through
44172 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
44177 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
44183 try searching with the regexp
44184 \begin_inset Newline newline
44188 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
44200 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
44201 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
44206 \begin_inset Newline newline
44209 in order to find word repetitions,
44213 \begin_layout Standard
44214 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
44215 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
44221 \begin_layout Standard
44222 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
44232 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
44233 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
44235 \begin_inset space ~
44239 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
44242 always refers to the first occurrence of
44243 \begin_inset Formula $()$
44246 in all entered regexps.
44254 \begin_layout Section
44256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44258 name "sec:Spellchecking"
44263 \begin_inset Index idx
44268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44277 \begin_layout Standard
44279 has a built-in spell checker.
44282 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44290 key or the toolbar button
44293 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44296 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
44297 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
44298 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
44299 Whenever an unknown word is found,
44300 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
44301 In the spellchecker sidebar,
44302 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
44303 if any could be found.
44304 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
44309 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
44310 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
44313 \begin_layout Standard
44315 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
44317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44321 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
44323 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
44324 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44335 arg "dialog-show character"
44338 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
44340 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
44343 \begin_layout Standard
44344 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44345 can be downloaded from here:
44346 \begin_inset Newline newline
44350 \begin_inset Flex URL
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44355 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
44357 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
44358 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
44359 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
44367 \begin_inset Newline newline
44371 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
44373 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
44374 You should download
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44380 files for each language
44381 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
44386 link at the end of the opened webpage)
44389 To install a dictionary on Windows,
44391 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44398 files into \SpecialChar LyX
44399 's installation subfolder
44407 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
44409 \begin_inset Newline newline
44412 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
44413 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
44414 but in most cases these are
44434 is the language code.
44437 \begin_layout Subsection
44441 \begin_layout Standard
44444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44445 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44453 you can set the following things:
44456 \begin_layout Description
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44461 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
44462 should use for spell checking.
44463 Depending on your platform,
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44475 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
44476 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44494 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
44497 \begin_layout Description
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44502 language If this field is not empty,
44504 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
44505 no matter what the document language is.
44508 \begin_layout Description
44510 \begin_inset space ~
44513 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
44515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44519 \begin_inset space \space{}
44523 This should normally not be needed.
44526 \begin_layout Description
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44535 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
44536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44546 \begin_layout Description
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44551 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
44552 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
44553 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
44554 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
44555 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
44558 \begin_layout Description
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44568 \begin_inset space ~
44571 comments If enabled,
44572 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
44575 \begin_layout Section
44577 \begin_inset Index idx
44582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44591 name "sec:Thesaurus"
44598 \begin_layout Standard
44600 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
44601 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
44602 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
44610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44611 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44613 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
44624 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
44628 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
44629 which are available for many languages.
44632 \begin_layout Standard
44633 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
44637 \begin_layout Subsection
44638 Setting up the thesaurus
44641 \begin_layout Standard
44650 thesauri consist of two files per language:
44651 A file with the suffix
44655 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
44660 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
44661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44665 \begin_inset space ~
44674 the US English files are named:
44677 \begin_layout Itemize
44681 \begin_layout Itemize
44685 \begin_layout Standard
44694 and its thesaurus installed,
44695 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
44698 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44699 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44700 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
44702 \begin_inset space ~
44707 ) to the path where they are installed.
44711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
44714 typical locations are
44721 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
44726 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
44731 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
44735 dictionaries are to be found at
44741 LibreOffice-<Version>
44749 the default location is
44751 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
44752 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
44753 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
44754 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
44755 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
44756 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
44765 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
44766 installation process,
44767 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
44770 \begin_layout Standard
44771 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
44773 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
44775 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
44778 thesaurus dictionaries,
44779 you can download them from here:
44780 \begin_inset Newline newline
44784 \begin_inset Flex URL
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44789 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
44791 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
44792 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
44793 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
44803 \begin_layout Standard
44804 To install a new dictionary,
44805 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
44807 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44808 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44809 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
44811 \begin_inset space ~
44816 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
44818 If this path is not defined yet,
44819 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
44823 \begin_layout Standard
44825 you can also install new dictionaries via
44827 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
44832 via your package manager (look for
44838 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
44842 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
44843 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
44845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44851 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44852 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44853 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44860 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
44863 \begin_layout Subsection
44864 Using the thesaurus
44867 \begin_layout Standard
44868 To start the thesaurus,
44871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44874 or the toolbar button
44877 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44880 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
44881 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
44882 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
44884 for some languages (such as English),
44885 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
44886 but also generic terms (such as
44895 related terms (such as
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44921 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
44931 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
44934 \begin_layout Standard
44935 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
44936 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
44937 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
44940 \begin_layout Standard
44941 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
44947 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
44949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44953 \begin_inset space \space{}
44956 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
44957 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
44958 infinitive for verbs).
44960 looking up the word form
44965 while results are shown for the word form
44970 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
44971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44975 \begin_inset space \space{}
44987 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
44988 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
44989 thus the ending remains).
44992 \begin_layout Section
44994 \begin_inset Index idx
44999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45006 \begin_inset Index idx
45011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45013 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45030 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
45037 \begin_layout Standard
45038 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
45039 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
45040 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
45042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45047 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45057 \begin_layout Standard
45058 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
45073 The color depends on the author that made the change.
45074 You can change the color in
45076 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45077 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45088 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45094 \begin_inset Index idx
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45115 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
45116 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
45117 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
45120 arg "changes-merge"
45126 \begin_layout Standard
45127 When change tracking is activated,
45128 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
45130 \begin_inset Index idx
45135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45137 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45154 \begin_layout Standard
45155 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45161 \begin_layout Standard
45162 \begin_inset Graphics
45163 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
45171 \begin_layout Standard
45172 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45178 \begin_layout Standard
45179 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
45182 \begin_layout Standard
45183 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45189 \begin_layout Standard
45190 \begin_inset Tabular
45191 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
45192 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45193 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45194 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 arg "changes-track"
45212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45223 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 arg "changes-output"
45251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45262 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45302 Jumps to the next change
45308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 arg "change-accept"
45325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45333 \begin_inset space ~
45336 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45356 arg "change-reject"
45364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45375 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45395 arg "changes-merge"
45403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45411 \begin_inset space ~
45414 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45416 \begin_inset space ~
45425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45434 arg "all-changes-accept"
45442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45453 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45455 \begin_inset space ~
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 arg "all-changes-reject"
45485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45496 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45498 \begin_inset space ~
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45535 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45537 \begin_inset space ~
45546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45571 \begin_inset space ~
45587 \begin_layout Standard
45588 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45594 \begin_layout Standard
45595 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
45596 especially no format changes like from
45615 \begin_layout Standard
45616 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
45618 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
45619 When you merge changes,
45620 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
45621 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
45622 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
45623 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
45626 \begin_layout Standard
45627 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
45630 \begin_layout Standard
45632 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
45633 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45639 \begin_inset Index idx
45644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45647 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
45665 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45672 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45678 \begin_layout Section
45679 Comparison of Documents
45680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45682 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
45687 \begin_inset Index idx
45692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45693 Comparison of documents
45701 \begin_layout Standard
45702 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
45705 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45709 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
45710 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
45711 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
45712 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
45715 \begin_inset space ~
45719 \begin_inset space ~
45723 \begin_inset space ~
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45740 \begin_inset space ~
45744 \begin_inset space ~
45748 \begin_inset space ~
45752 \begin_inset space ~
45757 enables the change tracking option
45760 \begin_inset space ~
45764 \begin_inset space ~
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45773 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
45776 \begin_layout Section
45777 International Support
45778 \begin_inset Index idx
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45784 International support
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
45794 with any language you want.
45795 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45800 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
45808 \begin_layout Standard
45811 also supports phonetic symbols,
45813 \begin_inset space ~
45817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45819 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
45827 \begin_layout Subsection
45829 \begin_inset Index idx
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 \begin_inset Index idx
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45873 \begin_inset Index idx
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 \begin_layout Standard
45900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45904 dialog lets you set
45907 the quote style and character encoding
45912 \begin_layout Standard
45917 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45927 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
45928 For details about the different encoding options see section
45929 \begin_inset space ~
45933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45935 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45943 \begin_layout Subsection
45944 Keyboard mapping configuration
45945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45947 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
45954 \begin_layout Standard
45955 If you have for example a U.
45956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45959 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
45960 you can use an alternate keymap.
45962 if you want to write in Italian,
45963 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
45964 to use an Italian keymap.
45967 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45968 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45969 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
45972 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45980 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
45986 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
45989 \begin_layout Standard
45991 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
45995 normally write in Italian on a U.
45996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45999 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
46001 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
46002 This and many other customizations are explained in the
46009 \begin_layout Chapter
46012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46014 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
46021 \begin_layout Standard
46022 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
46023 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
46026 \begin_layout Section
46028 \begin_inset Index idx
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 \begin_layout Standard
46057 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
46060 \begin_layout Subsection
46064 \begin_layout Standard
46065 Creates a new document.
46068 \begin_layout Subsection
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
46074 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
46075 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
46077 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
46079 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
46084 \begin_layout Subsection
46088 \begin_layout Standard
46092 \begin_layout Subsection
46096 \begin_layout Standard
46097 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
46098 Click there on a file to open it.
46101 \begin_layout Subsection
46103 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
46107 \begin_layout Standard
46109 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
46110 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
46114 \begin_layout Subsection
46118 \begin_layout Standard
46119 Closes the current document.
46122 \begin_layout Subsection
46126 \begin_layout Standard
46127 Closes all opened documents.
46130 \begin_layout Subsection
46134 \begin_layout Standard
46135 Saves the actual document.
46138 \begin_layout Subsection
46142 \begin_layout Standard
46143 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
46144 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
46148 \begin_layout Subsection
46150 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
46154 \begin_layout Standard
46156 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
46157 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
46162 \begin_layout Subsection
46166 \begin_layout Standard
46167 Saves all opened documents.
46170 \begin_layout Subsection
46174 \begin_layout Standard
46175 Reloads the actual document from disk.
46178 \begin_layout Subsection
46182 \begin_layout Standard
46183 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
46184 It is described in the section
46186 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
46191 Additional Features
46196 \begin_layout Subsection
46200 \begin_layout Standard
46201 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
46207 plain text files and comma separated,
46208 table-like text files (CSV).
46209 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 When using the menu entry
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46223 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
46224 when using the menu entry
46227 \begin_inset space ~
46231 \begin_inset space ~
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46241 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
46242 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
46245 \begin_layout Subsection
46247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46249 name "subsec:Export"
46256 \begin_layout Standard
46257 You can export your document to various file formats.
46258 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46260 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
46261 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
46262 during its configuration.
46265 \begin_layout Standard
46266 Here is a list of all available entries;
46267 some of them are explained in detail in section
46268 \begin_inset space ~
46272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46274 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46282 \begin_layout Description
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46291 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46296 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
46297 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
46298 \begin_inset Newline newline
46301 Since \SpecialChar LyX
46302 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
46306 \begin_layout Description
46307 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
46312 \begin_layout Description
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46317 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
46322 \begin_layout Description
46323 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
46324 's native DVI-format.
46325 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
46327 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
46334 \begin_layout Description
46335 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
46338 \begin_layout Description
46340 \begin_inset space ~
46347 ) DVI-format using the program
46349 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46353 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
46358 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46367 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
46375 \begin_layout Description
46377 \begin_inset space ~
46380 (cropped) the same as
46384 but with cropped page margins.
46387 \begin_layout Description
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46392 Dot text file with code in the programming language
46396 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
46401 \begin_layout Description
46406 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46415 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
46423 \begin_layout Description
46425 \begin_inset space ~
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46432 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
46437 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
46444 \begin_layout Description
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46457 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46458 source that is compilable with the program
46460 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46464 \begin_layout Description
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46473 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46475 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
46485 \begin_layout Description
46489 \begin_inset space ~
46494 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46496 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
46497 only this format is readable by the
46504 \begin_layout Description
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46517 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46518 source that is compilable with the program
46524 \begin_layout Description
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46530 \begin_inset space ~
46537 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46538 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
46543 \begin_layout Description
46545 \begin_inset space ~
46548 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
46549 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
46551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46555 \begin_inset space \space{}
46560 \begin_inset space ~
46565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46580 represent the version number)
46583 \begin_layout Description
46585 \begin_inset space ~
46589 \begin_inset space ~
46592 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
46594 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46599 \begin_layout Description
46600 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
46601 's internal XHTML engine
46604 \begin_layout Description
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46610 \begin_inset space ~
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46618 \begin_inset space ~
46621 XML Office Open XML file,
46627 For the conversion the program
46636 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
46639 \begin_layout Description
46640 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
46645 \begin_layout Description
46647 \begin_inset space ~
46650 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
46660 For the conversion the program
46669 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
46672 \begin_layout Description
46674 \begin_inset space ~
46677 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
46678 For the conversion the program
46687 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
46690 \begin_layout Description
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46695 (cropped) the same as
46698 \begin_inset space ~
46703 but with cropped page margins
46706 \begin_layout Description
46710 \begin_inset space ~
46715 PDF-format using the program
46720 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
46723 \begin_layout Description
46727 \begin_inset space ~
46731 \begin_inset space ~
46739 \begin_inset space ~
46744 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
46745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46749 \begin_inset space \space{}
46752 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
46755 \begin_layout Description
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46764 PDF-format using the program
46766 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46770 produces PDF-files directly
46773 \begin_layout Description
46777 \begin_inset space ~
46782 PDF-format using the program
46787 produces PDF-files directly
46790 \begin_layout Description
46794 \begin_inset space ~
46799 PDF-format using the program
46804 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
46807 \begin_layout Description
46811 \begin_inset space ~
46816 PDF-format using the program
46822 produces PDF-files directly
46825 \begin_layout Description
46829 \begin_inset space ~
46837 \begin_layout Description
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46845 \begin_inset space ~
46851 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
46856 \begin_layout Description
46861 PostScript format using the program
46870 options see section
46871 \begin_inset space ~
46875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46877 reference "subsec:General-output"
46885 \begin_layout Description
46886 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46887 source and also code in the statistical programming language
46900 it is possible to use
46904 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
46908 \begin_layout Standard
46909 If one of the menu entries
46917 \begin_inset space ~
46927 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46929 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
46932 \begin_inset space ~
46936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46938 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
46944 \begin_inset Index idx
46949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46950 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
46959 \begin_layout Subsection
46963 \begin_layout Standard
46964 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
46967 \begin_inset space ~
46971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46973 reference "sec:Paths"
46979 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
46988 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
46989 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
46990 's preferences as described in section
46991 \begin_inset space ~
46995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46997 reference "subsec:Converters"
47005 \begin_layout Subsection
47006 New and Close Window
47009 \begin_layout Standard
47010 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47014 \begin_layout Subsection
47018 \begin_layout Standard
47019 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
47022 \begin_layout Section
47024 \begin_inset Index idx
47029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47031 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 \begin_layout Subsection
47052 \begin_layout Standard
47053 Described in section
47054 \begin_inset space ~
47058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47060 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
47068 \begin_layout Subsection
47076 \begin_layout Standard
47077 Described in section
47078 \begin_inset space ~
47082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47084 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47092 \begin_layout Subsection
47096 \begin_layout Standard
47097 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
47098 If the cursor is outside an inset,
47099 the whole document will be selected.
47102 \begin_layout Subsection
47106 \begin_layout Standard
47107 Selects the whole document.
47110 \begin_layout Subsection
47111 Find & Replace (Quick)
47114 \begin_layout Standard
47115 Described in section
47116 \begin_inset space ~
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47122 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47130 \begin_layout Subsection
47131 Find & Replace (Advanced)
47134 \begin_layout Standard
47135 Described in section
47136 \begin_inset space ~
47140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47142 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
47150 \begin_layout Subsection
47151 Move Paragraph Up/Down
47154 \begin_layout Standard
47155 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
47158 \begin_layout Subsection
47160 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
47164 \begin_layout Standard
47166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
47167 Described in section
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47174 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
47184 \begin_layout Subsection
47186 \begin_inset Index idx
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47193 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47210 \begin_layout Standard
47211 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
47212 line spacing and label width.
47213 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
47216 \begin_layout Standard
47217 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
47223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47226 \begin_inset space ~
47232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
47236 \begin_layout Subsection
47238 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
47242 \begin_layout Standard
47244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
47245 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
47249 \begin_layout Enumerate
47251 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
47252 Customize text properties by means of the
47258 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
47262 this is described in section
47263 \begin_inset space ~
47267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47269 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
47277 \begin_layout Enumerate
47279 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
47280 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
47282 Apply last settings
47285 \begin_layout Enumerate
47287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
47288 Change the casing of selected text (
47305 \begin_layout Subsection
47307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
47311 \begin_layout Standard
47313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
47314 This sub-menu only appears
47315 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
47317 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
47318 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47350 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
47360 \begin_layout Subsection
47361 Table and Rows & Columns
47364 \begin_layout Standard
47365 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
47366 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
47367 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
47370 \begin_layout Subsection
47374 \begin_layout Standard
47375 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
47376 It will dissolve this inset.
47377 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
47380 \begin_layout Subsection
47384 \begin_layout Standard
47385 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
47386 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
47389 \begin_layout Subsection
47390 Increase/Decrease List Depth
47393 \begin_layout Standard
47394 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
47395 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47402 reference "sec:Nesting"
47408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47410 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47418 \begin_layout Section
47420 \begin_inset Index idx
47425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47427 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47444 \begin_layout Standard
47445 At the bottom of the
47449 menu the opened documents are listed.
47452 \begin_layout Subsection
47453 Open/Close all Insets
47456 \begin_layout Standard
47457 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
47460 \begin_layout Subsection
47461 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
47464 \begin_layout Standard
47465 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
47468 \begin_layout Standard
47469 Math macros are described in the
47476 \begin_layout Subsection
47480 \begin_layout Standard
47481 Shows the outline window as described in sections
47482 \begin_inset space ~
47486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47488 reference "sec:Navigating"
47494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47496 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
47504 \begin_layout Subsection
47508 \begin_layout Standard
47509 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
47510 as described in section
47511 \begin_inset space ~
47515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47517 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47525 \begin_layout Subsection
47529 \begin_layout Standard
47530 Opens a window showing console messages.
47531 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
47533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47537 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
47538 is processing the document.
47541 \begin_layout Subsection
47543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47545 name "subsec:Toolbars"
47550 \begin_inset Index idx
47555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47564 \begin_layout Standard
47565 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
47566 All toolbars and the
47569 \begin_inset space ~
47587 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
47589 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
47591 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
47595 \begin_layout Standard
47597 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
47601 \begin_inset space ~
47622 \begin_inset space ~
47635 \begin_inset space ~
47640 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
47643 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
47648 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
47650 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
47665 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
47666 denoted in the menu with the suffix
47675 \begin_layout Standard
47680 state the toolbar is permanently shown
47681 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
47687 state it is never shown
47694 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
47695 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
47696 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
47697 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
47699 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
47704 \begin_layout Standard
47706 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47713 reference "sec:Toolbars"
47721 \begin_layout Subsection
47725 \begin_layout Standard
47729 \begin_inset space ~
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47754 will split \SpecialChar LyX
47755 's main window vertically while
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_inset space ~
47774 \begin_inset space ~
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47783 will split it horizontally.
47784 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
47785 or to view the same document,
47786 but at different positions.
47787 You can even split the main window several times to view,
47789 three or more documents at the same time.
47790 To close a split view,
47794 \begin_inset space ~
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47806 \begin_layout Subsection
47810 \begin_layout Standard
47811 Closes a split view.
47814 \begin_layout Subsection
47818 \begin_layout Standard
47819 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
47820 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
47821 's main window fullscreen.
47822 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
47824 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
47827 \begin_layout Section
47829 \begin_inset Index idx
47834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47853 \begin_layout Subsection
47857 \begin_layout Standard
47858 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
47859 \begin_inset space ~
47863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47865 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
47877 \begin_layout Subsection
47879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47881 name "subsec:Special-Character"
47888 \begin_layout Standard
47889 Here you can insert the following characters:
47892 \begin_layout Description
47897 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47899 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
47900 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47901 -packages you have installed.
47902 You can get a complete display by checking
47905 \begin_inset space ~
47911 \begin_inset Newline newline
47915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47924 Not all characters will be visible in the
47928 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
47929 \begin_inset space ~
47933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47935 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47940 ) can display every character.
47948 \begin_layout Description
47949 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
47954 \begin_layout Description
47956 \begin_inset space ~
47960 \begin_inset space ~
47963 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
47964 \begin_inset space ~
47968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47970 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
47978 \begin_layout Description
47980 \begin_inset space ~
47983 Quote Inserts this quote:
47985 no matter what quote style you selected in the
47987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47994 \begin_layout Description
47996 \begin_inset space ~
47999 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
48001 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48002 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48008 \begin_layout Description
48010 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
48012 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
48016 \begin_inset space ~
48019 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
48020 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
48022 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
48026 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
48030 \begin_layout Description
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48035 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
48036 \SpecialChar breakableslash
48040 \begin_layout Description
48042 \begin_inset space ~
48046 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
48047 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
48053 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48058 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
48060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48064 \begin_inset space \space{}
48067 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
48068 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
48075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48078 To insert a fraction use the command
48083 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48087 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
48093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48096 The visible space is hereby the character before the
48103 \begin_layout Description
48105 \begin_inset space ~
48108 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
48109 \SpecialChar menuseparator
48113 \begin_layout Description
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset Index idx
48124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48131 \begin_inset Index idx
48136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48138 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48152 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
48153 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48159 \begin_inset Index idx
48164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48167 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48182 \begin_inset Newline newline
48185 More information about this feature can be found in the
48191 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48197 \begin_layout Description
48198 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
48203 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
48207 \begin_layout Subsection
48211 \begin_layout Standard
48212 Opens a submenu with the following options:
48215 \begin_layout Description
48216 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
48218 \begin_inset script superscript
48220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48230 \begin_layout Description
48231 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
48233 \begin_inset script subscript
48235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48244 \begin_layout Description
48246 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
48248 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
48252 \begin_inset space ~
48256 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
48258 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
48261 space as described in section
48262 \begin_inset space ~
48266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48268 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
48276 \begin_layout Description
48278 \begin_inset space ~
48281 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
48282 \begin_inset space ~
48286 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
48288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48290 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
48296 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
48298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48300 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
48310 \begin_layout Description
48312 \begin_inset space ~
48315 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48322 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
48330 \begin_layout Description
48332 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
48334 \begin_inset space ~
48337 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
48339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48343 \begin_inset space \space{}
48346 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
48347 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
48354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48357 To insert a fraction use the command
48362 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48366 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
48372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48375 The visible space is hereby the character before the
48384 \begin_layout Description
48386 \begin_inset space ~
48389 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
48390 \begin_inset space ~
48394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48396 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
48404 \begin_layout Description
48406 \begin_inset space ~
48409 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
48410 \begin_inset space ~
48414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48416 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
48424 \begin_layout Description
48426 \begin_inset space ~
48429 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
48430 \begin_inset space ~
48434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48436 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
48444 \begin_layout Description
48445 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
48446 \begin_inset space ~
48450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48452 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
48460 \begin_layout Description
48462 \begin_inset space ~
48465 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
48466 \begin_inset space ~
48470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48472 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
48480 \begin_layout Description
48482 \begin_inset space ~
48485 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
48486 \begin_inset space ~
48490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48492 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
48500 \begin_layout Description
48502 \begin_inset space ~
48506 \begin_inset space ~
48509 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
48511 \begin_inset space ~
48515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48517 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
48525 for a usage example.
48528 \begin_layout Description
48530 \begin_inset space ~
48534 \begin_inset space ~
48537 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
48538 \begin_inset space ~
48542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48544 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
48552 \begin_layout Description
48554 \begin_inset space ~
48557 Break Inserts a forced line break that
48558 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
48561 justifies the remaining text as described in section
48562 \begin_inset space ~
48566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48568 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
48576 \begin_layout Description
48578 \begin_inset space ~
48581 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
48582 \begin_inset space ~
48586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48588 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
48596 \begin_layout Description
48598 \begin_inset space ~
48601 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
48602 as described in section
48603 \begin_inset space ~
48607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48609 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
48615 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
48619 \begin_layout Description
48621 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
48623 \begin_inset space ~
48627 \begin_inset space ~
48630 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
48631 to prevent a page break at the given position.
48633 \begin_inset space ~
48637 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
48639 \begin_inset space ~
48643 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
48645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48647 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
48657 \begin_layout Description
48659 \begin_inset space ~
48662 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
48663 \begin_inset space ~
48667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48669 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
48677 \begin_layout Description
48679 \begin_inset space ~
48683 \begin_inset space ~
48686 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
48687 \begin_inset space ~
48691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48693 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
48701 \begin_layout Subsection
48703 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48707 \begin_layout Standard
48709 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48710 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
48711 The submenu allows you to insert
48714 \begin_layout Description
48716 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48718 \begin_inset space ~
48721 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
48724 \begin_layout Description
48726 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48728 \begin_inset space ~
48732 \begin_inset space ~
48735 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
48738 \begin_layout Description
48740 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48742 \begin_inset space ~
48745 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
48748 \begin_layout Description
48750 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48752 \begin_inset space ~
48755 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
48758 \begin_layout Description
48760 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48762 \begin_inset space ~
48766 \begin_inset space ~
48769 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
48772 \begin_layout Description
48774 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48776 \begin_inset space ~
48779 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
48782 \begin_layout Description
48784 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
48786 \begin_inset space ~
48790 \begin_inset space ~
48794 \begin_inset space ~
48797 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
48800 \begin_layout Description
48802 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
48804 \begin_inset space ~
48808 \begin_inset space ~
48811 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
48813 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
48816 \begin_layout Description
48818 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48820 \begin_inset space ~
48823 Name inserts the user name as specified in
48825 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48826 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48832 \begin_layout Description
48834 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48836 \begin_inset space ~
48839 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
48841 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48842 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48848 \begin_layout Description
48850 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
48851 Other\SpecialChar ldots
48852 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
48855 \begin_layout Subsection
48858 List/Contents/References
48861 \begin_layout Standard
48862 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
48866 \begin_inset space ~
48890 are described in section
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48897 reference "sec:toc"
48907 is described in section
48908 \begin_inset space ~
48912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48914 reference "sec:Index"
48924 is described in section
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48931 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
48938 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48941 is described in section
48942 \begin_inset space ~
48946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48948 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48956 \begin_layout Subsection
48960 \begin_layout Standard
48962 as described in section
48963 \begin_inset space ~
48967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48969 reference "sec:Floats"
48974 and in detail the chapter
48981 \begin_inset space ~
48989 \begin_layout Subsection
48993 \begin_layout Standard
48995 described in section
48996 \begin_inset space ~
49000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49002 reference "sec:Notes"
49010 \begin_layout Subsection
49014 \begin_layout Standard
49015 Inserts a branch inset,
49017 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
49018 Branches are described in section
49019 \begin_inset space ~
49023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49025 reference "sec:Branches"
49033 \begin_layout Subsection
49037 \begin_layout Standard
49038 Inserts document class-specific insets.
49039 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
49040 An example is the document class
49041 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
49043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49051 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
49055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49060 with three custom insets.
49063 Flex insets and InsetLayout
49067 Installing New Document Classes,
49068 The Layout file format
49074 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
49077 \begin_layout Subsection
49079 \begin_inset Index idx
49084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49093 \begin_layout Standard
49094 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
49095 For more information see chapter
49097 External Document Parts
49100 \begin_inset space ~
49106 \begin_layout Subsection
49108 \begin_inset Index idx
49113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49122 \begin_layout Standard
49123 Inserts a box in a certain style.
49124 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
49131 \begin_inset space ~
49139 \begin_layout Subsection
49143 \begin_layout Standard
49148 dialog as described in section
49149 \begin_inset space ~
49153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49155 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49163 \begin_layout Subsection
49167 \begin_layout Standard
49172 as described in section
49173 \begin_inset space ~
49177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49179 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49187 \begin_layout Subsection
49191 \begin_layout Standard
49196 as described in section
49197 \begin_inset space ~
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49203 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49211 \begin_layout Subsection
49213 \begin_inset Index idx
49218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49225 \begin_inset Index idx
49230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49232 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49259 \begin_layout Standard
49260 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
49261 Floats are described in section
49262 \begin_inset space ~
49266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49268 reference "sec:Floats"
49274 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
49277 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
49285 \begin_inset space ~
49293 \begin_layout Subsection
49297 \begin_layout Standard
49298 Inserts an index entry as described in section
49299 \begin_inset space ~
49303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49305 reference "sec:Index"
49313 \begin_layout Subsection
49317 \begin_layout Standard
49318 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
49319 \begin_inset space ~
49323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49325 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
49333 \begin_layout Subsection
49337 \begin_layout Standard
49338 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
49339 Tables are described in section
49340 \begin_inset space ~
49344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49346 reference "sec:Tables"
49351 and in detail in the chapter
49358 \begin_inset space ~
49366 \begin_layout Subsection
49370 \begin_layout Standard
49376 Graphics are described in section
49377 \begin_inset space ~
49381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49383 reference "sec:Graphics"
49391 \begin_layout Subsection
49395 \begin_layout Standard
49396 Inserts a URL as described in section
49397 \begin_inset space ~
49401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49403 reference "subsec:URLs"
49411 \begin_layout Subsection
49415 \begin_layout Standard
49416 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
49417 \begin_inset space ~
49421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49423 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
49431 \begin_layout Subsection
49435 \begin_layout Standard
49436 Inserts a footnote as described in section
49437 \begin_inset space ~
49441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49443 reference "sec:Footnotes"
49451 \begin_layout Subsection
49455 \begin_layout Standard
49456 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
49457 \begin_inset space ~
49461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49463 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
49471 \begin_layout Subsection
49474 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
49477 \begin_layout Standard
49478 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49486 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
49491 for an explanation.
49494 \begin_layout Subsection
49498 \begin_layout Standard
49499 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
49500 in or behind a section heading,
49501 title or caption of a float.
49502 Inserts a short title as described in section
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49509 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
49517 \begin_layout Subsection
49522 \begin_layout Standard
49523 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
49524 Code box as described in section
49525 \begin_inset space ~
49529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49531 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
49539 \begin_layout Subsection
49541 \begin_inset Index idx
49546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49555 \begin_layout Standard
49556 Inserts a program listings box.
49557 Program listings are explained in the chapter
49559 Program Code Listings
49564 \begin_inset space ~
49572 \begin_layout Subsection
49574 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
49578 \begin_layout Standard
49580 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
49581 Inserts the actual date.
49582 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
49588 \begin_layout Subsection
49592 \begin_layout Standard
49593 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
49594 \begin_inset space ~
49598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49600 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49608 \begin_layout Section
49610 \begin_inset Index idx
49615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49617 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49634 \begin_layout Standard
49635 This menu lists the existing chapters,
49640 \begin_inset space ~
49643 of the current document.
49644 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
49647 \begin_layout Subsection
49651 \begin_layout Standard
49652 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
49653 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
49656 \begin_inset space ~
49660 To create bookmarks for this example,
49662 \begin_inset space ~
49665 2.5 and use the submenu
49668 \begin_inset space ~
49672 \begin_inset space ~
49679 \begin_inset space ~
49685 \begin_inset space ~
49689 \begin_inset space ~
49695 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
49698 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
49704 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
49707 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
49710 \begin_layout Standard
49712 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
49713 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
49719 \begin_inset space ~
49724 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
49727 \begin_inset space ~
49732 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
49735 \begin_layout Subsection
49741 \begin_layout Standard
49742 Jump to the next note,
49744 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
49747 \begin_layout Subsection
49751 \begin_layout Standard
49752 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
49753 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
49754 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
49757 \begin_inset space ~
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49769 \begin_layout Subsection
49773 \begin_layout Standard
49774 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
49777 The \SpecialChar LyX
49778 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
49780 \begin_inset space ~
49788 \begin_inset space ~
49793 manual for a detailed description.
49796 \begin_layout Section
49798 \begin_inset Index idx
49803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49822 \begin_layout Subsection
49826 \begin_layout Standard
49827 Change Tracking is described in section
49828 \begin_inset space ~
49832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49834 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49842 \begin_layout Subsection
49850 \begin_layout Standard
49851 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
49852 by viewing or exporting a document,
49853 this menu will be enabled.
49854 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49856 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
49858 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
49859 \begin_inset Newline newline
49862 With the help of the logfile,
49863 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49867 \begin_layout Standard
49870 Open Containing Directory
49872 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
49873 's temporary folder for the document.
49874 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
49875 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
49876 For example some journals require to send the
49880 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49884 \begin_layout Subsection
49885 Start Appendix Here
49888 \begin_layout Standard
49889 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
49890 \begin_inset space ~
49894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49896 reference "sec:Appendices"
49904 \begin_layout Subsection
49906 \begin_inset space ~
49912 \begin_layout Standard
49913 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
49915 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49916 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49917 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
49919 \begin_inset space ~
49923 \begin_inset space ~
49930 \begin_inset space ~
49934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49936 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
49941 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
49944 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49945 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49947 \begin_inset space ~
49950 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49952 \begin_inset space ~
49955 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
49957 \begin_inset space ~
49961 \begin_inset space ~
49968 \begin_inset space ~
49972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49974 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49979 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
49980 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
49982 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49983 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49985 \begin_inset space ~
49988 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49990 \begin_inset space ~
49993 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
49998 \begin_inset space ~
50002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50004 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50010 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50011 when it is first configured.
50012 The default output format is
50015 \begin_inset space ~
50023 \begin_layout Subsection
50024 View (Other Formats)
50027 \begin_layout Standard
50028 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
50029 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
50030 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
50031 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50032 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
50034 All possible formats are listed in section
50035 \begin_inset space ~
50039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50041 reference "subsec:Export"
50047 You should at least see the menu entry
50053 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
50055 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
50057 \begin_inset space ~
50061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50063 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
50069 \begin_inset Index idx
50074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50075 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
50084 \begin_layout Standard
50085 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
50086 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50088 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50089 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50091 \begin_inset space ~
50094 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50096 \begin_inset space ~
50099 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50104 \begin_inset space ~
50108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50110 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50116 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50117 when it is first configured.
50120 \begin_layout Subsection
50122 \begin_inset space ~
50128 \begin_layout Standard
50129 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
50132 \begin_layout Subsection
50133 Update (Other Formats)
50136 \begin_layout Standard
50137 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
50140 \begin_layout Subsection
50141 View Master Document
50144 \begin_layout Standard
50145 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
50147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50161 \begin_inset space ~
50166 manual for more information on this topic).
50167 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
50169 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
50173 \begin_inset space ~
50177 \begin_inset space ~
50182 generates the output of the whole book,
50187 will just output the chapter alone.
50190 \begin_layout Standard
50191 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
50193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50195 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50197 \begin_inset space ~
50201 \begin_inset space ~
50208 \begin_inset space ~
50212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50214 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50219 ) or in the preferences (menu
50221 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50222 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50224 \begin_inset space ~
50227 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50232 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50238 \begin_inset space ~
50245 \begin_inset space ~
50249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50251 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50259 \begin_layout Subsection
50260 Update Master Document
50263 \begin_layout Standard
50264 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
50266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50280 \begin_inset space ~
50285 manual for more information on this topic).
50286 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
50289 \begin_layout Standard
50290 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
50292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50293 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50294 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50296 \begin_inset space ~
50300 \begin_inset space ~
50307 \begin_inset space ~
50311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50313 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50318 ) or in the preferences (menu
50320 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50321 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50323 \begin_inset space ~
50326 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50328 \begin_inset space ~
50331 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50333 \begin_inset space ~
50337 \begin_inset space ~
50344 \begin_inset space ~
50348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50350 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50358 \begin_layout Subsection
50360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50362 name "subsec:Compressed"
50369 \begin_layout Standard
50370 Un/compresses the current document.
50371 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
50373 Additional Features
50375 manual for details).
50378 \begin_layout Subsection
50382 \begin_layout Standard
50383 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
50386 \begin_layout Subsection
50390 \begin_layout Standard
50391 The document settings are described in appendix
50392 \begin_inset space ~
50396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50398 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
50406 \begin_layout Section
50408 \begin_inset Index idx
50413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50432 \begin_layout Subsection
50436 \begin_layout Standard
50437 Spell checking is explained in section
50438 \begin_inset space ~
50442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50444 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50452 \begin_layout Subsection
50456 \begin_layout Standard
50457 The thesaurus is described in section
50458 \begin_inset space ~
50462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50464 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
50472 \begin_layout Subsection
50474 \begin_inset Index idx
50479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50486 \begin_inset Index idx
50491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50500 \begin_layout Standard
50501 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
50504 \begin_layout Subsection
50510 \begin_inset Index idx
50515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50516 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
50525 \begin_layout Standard
50526 Generates with the help of the program
50528 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
50531 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
50532 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
50533 This feature is not available on Windows.
50536 \begin_layout Subsection
50542 \begin_inset Index idx
50547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50557 \begin_layout Standard
50558 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
50563 \begin_inset space ~
50568 to see the full filename paths.
50571 \begin_layout Subsection
50573 \begin_inset Index idx
50578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50587 \begin_layout Standard
50588 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
50589 files as described in section
50590 \begin_inset space ~
50594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50596 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
50604 \begin_layout Subsection
50606 \begin_inset Index idx
50611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50624 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
50627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50628 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
50640 \begin_inset Index idx
50645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50646 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
50655 \begin_layout Standard
50656 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
50660 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50661 -packages and programs it needs;
50663 \begin_inset space ~
50667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50669 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
50677 \begin_layout Subsection
50681 \begin_layout Standard
50686 dialog as described in detail in appendix
50687 \begin_inset space ~
50691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50693 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50701 \begin_layout Section
50703 \begin_inset Index idx
50708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50710 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50727 \begin_layout Standard
50728 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
50729 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
50731 If a file is not available in this language,
50732 the English version will be listed.
50735 \begin_layout Standard
50739 \begin_inset space ~
50744 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
50745 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50746 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
50748 \begin_inset space ~
50752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50754 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
50762 \begin_layout Standard
50766 \begin_inset space ~
50771 gives information about the copyright,
50772 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
50773 version you are using.
50776 \begin_layout Section
50778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50780 name "sec:Toolbars"
50787 \begin_layout Standard
50788 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
50789 \begin_inset space ~
50793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50795 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
50803 \begin_layout Standard
50804 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
50805 This is described in the
50807 Additional Features
50812 \begin_layout Subsection
50814 \begin_inset Index idx
50819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50821 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50838 \begin_layout Standard
50839 \begin_inset Graphics
50840 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
50848 \begin_layout Standard
50849 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50855 \begin_layout Standard
50856 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
50860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50872 \begin_inset Note Note
50875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50876 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
50881 manual for more information.
50889 \begin_layout Standard
50890 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50896 \begin_layout Standard
50897 \begin_inset Tabular
50898 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
50899 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
50900 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50907 \begin_inset Graphics
50908 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
50918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50922 pull-down box for the environments
50935 \begin_layout Standard
50936 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
50942 \begin_layout Standard
50944 \begin_inset Tabular
50945 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
50946 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
50947 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50948 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50972 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51002 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51032 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51048 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
51056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51062 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51078 arg "spelling-continuously"
51086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51090 Spellcheck continuously
51096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51149 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51179 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51209 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51241 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
51246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51264 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
51272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51278 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51304 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
51312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51318 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51346 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
51354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51360 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51361 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
51368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51391 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
51394 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51396 \begin_inset space ~
51399 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
51401 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
51407 arg "dialog-show character"
51418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51439 Set text to noun style,
51441 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
51444 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51446 \begin_inset space ~
51449 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
51451 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
51457 arg "dialog-show character"
51468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51474 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
51477 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
51485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51490 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
51493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51506 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
51511 arg "textstyle-apply"
51521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51526 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
51527 Format text using the current settings in the
51529 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51531 \begin_inset space ~
51534 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
51545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51569 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
51571 \begin_inset space ~
51580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51589 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
51597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51617 arg "tabular-insert"
51625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51644 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
51647 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
51655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51660 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
51663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
51687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51691 Toggle outline window on/off,
51694 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
51701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51710 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
51718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51722 Toggle math toolbar on/off
51728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51737 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
51745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51749 Toggle table toolbar on/off
51762 \begin_layout Subsection
51764 \begin_inset Index idx
51769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51771 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51788 \begin_layout Standard
51789 \begin_inset Graphics
51790 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
51798 \begin_layout Standard
51799 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51805 \begin_layout Standard
51806 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
51809 \begin_layout Standard
51810 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51816 \begin_layout Standard
51817 \begin_inset Tabular
51818 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
51819 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51820 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51821 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51858 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
51866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51885 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
51893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51912 arg "layout-toggle List"
51920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51939 arg "layout-toggle Description"
51947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51966 arg "depth-increment"
51974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51980 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51982 \begin_inset space ~
51986 \begin_inset space ~
51995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52004 arg "depth-decrement"
52012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52018 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52020 \begin_inset space ~
52024 \begin_inset space ~
52033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52042 arg "float-insert figure"
52050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52057 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52073 arg "float-insert table"
52081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52088 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52134 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
52142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52164 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
52172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52210 \begin_inset space ~
52219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52228 arg "nomencl-insert"
52236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52244 \begin_inset space ~
52253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52262 arg "footnote-insert"
52270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52292 arg "marginalnote-insert"
52300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52308 \begin_inset space ~
52317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52341 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
52343 \begin_inset space ~
52352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52361 arg "box-insert Frameless"
52369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52437 \begin_inset space ~
52446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52455 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
52463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52470 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52486 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
52494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52503 \begin_inset space ~
52512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52521 arg "dialog-show character"
52529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52537 \begin_inset space ~
52540 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52553 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
52558 arg "textstyle-apply"
52566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52571 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
52572 Format text using the recent settings in the
52575 arg "dialog-show character"
52584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52593 arg "layout-paragraph"
52601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52609 \begin_inset space ~
52618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52627 arg "thesaurus-entry"
52635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52655 \begin_layout Subsection
52656 View/Update Toolbar
52657 \begin_inset Index idx
52662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52664 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52681 \begin_layout Standard
52682 \begin_inset Graphics
52683 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
52690 \begin_layout Standard
52691 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52697 \begin_layout Standard
52698 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52701 \begin_layout Standard
52702 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52708 \begin_layout Standard
52709 \begin_inset Tabular
52710 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
52711 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52712 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52713 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52753 arg "buffer-update"
52761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52783 arg "master-buffer-view"
52791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52799 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
52801 \begin_inset space ~
52807 \begin_inset space ~
52816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52825 arg "master-buffer-update"
52833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52841 \begin_inset space ~
52845 \begin_inset space ~
52854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52863 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
52871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52880 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
52882 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
52885 \SpecialChar menuseparator
52886 Synchronize with Output
52892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52903 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
52913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52920 View (Other Formats)
52926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52933 arg "update-others"
52937 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
52945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52952 Update (Other Formats)
52965 \begin_layout Standard
52967 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
52968 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
52973 \begin_layout Subsection
52977 \begin_layout Standard
52978 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
52979 \begin_inset space ~
52983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52985 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52992 \begin_inset Index idx
52997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52999 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53016 \begin_inset space ~
53021 manual and the math macro toolbar
53022 \begin_inset Index idx
53027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53029 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53050 \begin_layout Chapter
53051 The Document Settings
53052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53054 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
53059 \begin_inset Index idx
53064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53083 \begin_layout Standard
53087 \begin_inset space ~
53092 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
53094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53098 You can save your document settings as default with the
53100 Save as Document Defaults
53102 button in any dialog.
53103 This will create a template named
53107 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
53108 when you create a new document without using a template.
53111 \begin_layout Standard
53116 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
53117 This affects mostly class options,
53118 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
53121 \begin_layout Standard
53122 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
53123 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
53124 To find a setting quicker,
53125 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
53127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53131 \begin_inset space \space{}
53135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53143 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
53144 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
53145 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
53148 \begin_layout Section
53152 \begin_layout Standard
53153 Here you set the document class,
53156 and a master document.
53157 Document classes are described in section
53158 \begin_inset space ~
53162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53164 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
53172 \begin_layout Standard
53176 \begin_inset space ~
53181 you can load you own layout-file,
53182 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
53187 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
53188 as a layout for a document class.
53189 For more about layout-files,
53192 Installing New Document Classes,
53193 Types of Layout Files
53202 \begin_layout Standard
53203 Some classes use special class options by default.
53204 If this is the case,
53205 they are listed in the field
53209 and you can decide to use them or not.
53210 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
53211 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
53216 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
53218 color and page layout packages.
53224 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53226 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
53230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53231 When you want to use one of the following drivers
53232 \begin_inset Newline newline
53246 \begin_inset Newline newline
53249 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
53256 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53258 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
53271 \begin_layout Standard
53276 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
53277 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
53278 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
53279 This way child documents are always compilable.
53280 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
53287 \begin_inset space ~
53295 \begin_layout Standard
53296 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53306 \begin_inset Index idx
53311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53329 \begin_inset Index idx
53334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53351 for cross-references,
53353 \begin_inset space ~
53357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53359 reference "sec:Cross-References"
53367 \begin_layout Section
53371 \begin_layout Standard
53372 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
53373 Please refer to the section
53376 \begin_inset space ~
53384 \begin_inset space ~
53389 manual for details.
53392 \begin_layout Section
53396 \begin_layout Standard
53397 Modules are explained in section
53398 \begin_inset space ~
53402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53404 reference "subsec:Modules"
53412 \begin_layout Section
53416 \begin_layout Standard
53418 \begin_inset space ~
53422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53424 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
53432 \begin_layout Section
53436 \begin_layout Standard
53437 The document font settings are described in section
53438 \begin_inset space ~
53442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53444 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
53452 \begin_layout Section
53456 \begin_layout Standard
53457 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
53469 \begin_inset space ~
53474 and whether it should be a
53477 \begin_inset space ~
53482 can also be specified here.
53485 \begin_layout Standard
53486 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
53487 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
53488 That would be impractical,
53490 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
53492 it will be as you specified in the output.
53495 \begin_layout Standard
53498 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
53501 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
53502 justifies the text on screen.
53503 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
53505 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
53509 \begin_layout Standard
53511 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
53520 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
53525 \begin_layout Section
53529 \begin_layout Standard
53530 This dialog is described in sections
53531 \begin_inset space ~
53535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53537 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
53543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53545 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
53553 \begin_layout Section
53557 \begin_layout Standard
53558 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
53559 \begin_inset space ~
53563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53565 reference "subsec:Margins"
53573 \begin_layout Section
53575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53577 name "sec:Language-encodings"
53582 \begin_inset Index idx
53587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53606 \begin_layout Standard
53607 The document language and quote styles are set here.
53608 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53609 (the \SpecialChar LyX
53610 file is always encoded in utf8).
53611 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
53612 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
53613 -command is not known for a particular character).
53614 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
53618 \begin_layout Standard
53620 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
53623 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
53624 files in Unicode – or utf8,
53625 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
53626 's default encoding).
53627 This should normally fit your needs,
53628 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
53629 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
53630 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
53631 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
53633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53641 encodings is necessary.
53644 \begin_layout Standard
53646 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
53648 provides support for these traditional encodings.
53651 Traditional (auto-selected)
53659 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
53661 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
53665 \begin_layout Standard
53667 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
53668 If you use the option
53674 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
53677 If the document contains text in more than one language you
53678 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
53681 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53684 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
53685 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
53686 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
53691 \begin_layout Standard
53693 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
53702 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
53704 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
53708 \begin_layout Standard
53710 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
53712 you can also select
53717 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
53718 Note that this encoding is then used for
53723 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
53726 \begin_layout Standard
53728 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
53730 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
53734 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
53735 Do not load inputenc
53736 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
53740 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
53742 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
53744 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
53746 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
53747 in the next dropdown menu
53748 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
53749 does what it states:
53751 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
53753 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
53755 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
53756 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
53757 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53763 \begin_inset Index idx
53768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53770 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
53775 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53780 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
53794 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
53796 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
53798 Note that this option is only available for the standard
53804 Traditional (auto-selected)
53811 \begin_layout Standard
53813 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
53815 also supports Unicode output,
53816 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
53818 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
53819 installation supports Unicode),
53820 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
53821 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
53822 is quite incomplete,
53823 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
53827 (when \SpecialChar LyX
53828 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
53830 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
53831 -commands is not used,
53832 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
53833 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
53834 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
53836 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
53838 Both engines support Unicode natively.
53840 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
53843 \begin_inset space ~
53852 \begin_inset space ~
53860 \begin_inset space ~
53867 \begin_inset space ~
53871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53873 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
53879 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
53884 you might try out one of these new engines.
53889 \begin_layout Standard
53893 \begin_inset space ~
53898 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53899 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
53900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53908 The possible settings are:
53911 \begin_layout Description
53912 Default uses the language package that is selected in
53914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53915 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
53919 \begin_inset space ~
53923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53925 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
53933 \begin_layout Description
53934 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
53935 In many cases this will be
53940 \begin_inset Index idx
53945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53963 If the newer package
53968 \begin_inset Index idx
53973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53990 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
53991 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
53992 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
53994 this package will be used instead of
54001 \begin_layout Description
54003 \begin_inset space ~
54014 would be more appropriate.
54017 \begin_layout Description
54018 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
54019 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
54023 (for German texts),
54027 \begin_inset Newline newline
54032 usepackage{ngerman}
54035 \begin_layout Description
54036 None will not use a language package.
54037 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
54040 \begin_layout Standard
54041 Here is a list with the important encodings:
54044 \begin_layout Description
54046 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
54048 \begin_inset space ~
54052 \begin_inset space ~
54056 \begin_inset space ~
54064 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54070 \begin_inset Index idx
54075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54094 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54100 \begin_layout Description
54101 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
54102 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
54104 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
54106 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
54107 -commands are needed.
54109 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
54110 This is the same as the
54123 \begin_layout Description
54125 \begin_inset space ~
54129 \begin_inset space ~
54132 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
54135 \begin_layout Description
54137 \begin_inset space ~
54141 \begin_inset space ~
54144 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
54147 \begin_layout Description
54149 \begin_inset space ~
54152 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
54155 \begin_layout Description
54157 \begin_inset space ~
54161 \begin_inset space ~
54164 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
54165 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54166 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
54169 \begin_layout Description
54171 \begin_inset space ~
54175 \begin_inset space ~
54178 8859-13) for Estonian,
54179 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54180 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
54183 \begin_layout Description
54185 \begin_inset space ~
54189 \begin_inset space ~
54192 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
54193 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54194 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
54197 \begin_layout Description
54199 \begin_inset space ~
54203 \begin_inset space ~
54207 \begin_inset space ~
54210 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
54211 \begin_inset space ~
54217 \begin_layout Description
54219 \begin_inset space ~
54223 \begin_inset space ~
54227 \begin_inset space ~
54230 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
54237 Slovak and Slovenian
54240 \begin_layout Description
54242 \begin_inset space ~
54246 \begin_inset space ~
54249 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
54250 used especially on UNIX OSes,
54251 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
54252 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54253 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
54254 \begin_inset space ~
54258 \begin_inset space ~
54264 \begin_layout Description
54266 \begin_inset space ~
54270 \begin_inset space ~
54273 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
54274 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
54275 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
54276 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54277 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
54278 \begin_inset space ~
54282 \begin_inset space ~
54288 \begin_layout Description
54290 \begin_inset space ~
54294 \begin_inset space ~
54297 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
54300 \begin_layout Description
54302 \begin_inset space ~
54306 \begin_inset space ~
54309 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
54312 \begin_layout Description
54314 \begin_inset space ~
54318 \begin_inset space ~
54321 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
54324 Serbian and Ukrainian
54327 \begin_layout Description
54329 \begin_inset space ~
54332 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
54335 \begin_layout Description
54337 \begin_inset space ~
54340 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
54343 \begin_layout Description
54345 \begin_inset space ~
54349 \begin_inset space ~
54352 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
54355 \begin_layout Description
54357 \begin_inset space ~
54361 \begin_inset space ~
54367 \begin_layout Description
54369 \begin_inset space ~
54373 \begin_inset space ~
54376 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
54377 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
54380 \begin_layout Description
54382 \begin_inset space ~
54386 \begin_inset space ~
54392 \begin_layout Description
54394 \begin_inset space ~
54398 \begin_inset space ~
54401 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
54402 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54408 \begin_inset Index idx
54413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54416 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54432 set the document language to
54437 \begin_layout Description
54439 \begin_inset space ~
54443 \begin_inset space ~
54446 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
54447 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54454 set the document language to
54457 \begin_inset space ~
54463 \begin_layout Description
54465 \begin_inset space ~
54469 \begin_inset space ~
54472 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
54473 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54479 \begin_inset Index idx
54484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54487 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54503 set the document language to
54508 \begin_layout Description
54510 \begin_inset space ~
54514 \begin_inset space ~
54517 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
54518 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54525 set the document language to
54530 \begin_layout Description
54532 \begin_inset space ~
54536 \begin_inset space ~
54539 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
54540 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54547 set the document language to
54552 \begin_layout Description
54554 \begin_inset space ~
54557 (EUC-KR) for Korean
54560 \begin_layout Description
54562 \begin_inset space ~
54566 \begin_inset space ~
54570 \begin_inset space ~
54573 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
54575 Maltese and Turkish
54578 \begin_layout Description
54580 \begin_inset space ~
54584 \begin_inset space ~
54588 \begin_inset space ~
54591 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
54600 Romanian and Slovenian,
54601 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
54604 \begin_layout Description
54606 \begin_inset space ~
54610 \begin_inset space ~
54616 \begin_layout Description
54618 \begin_inset space ~
54622 \begin_inset space ~
54625 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
54626 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
54629 \begin_layout Description
54631 \begin_inset space ~
54635 \begin_inset space ~
54638 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54644 \begin_inset Index idx
54649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54652 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54666 (for the languages Chinese,
54667 Japanese and Korean)
54668 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
54670 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
54671 with the default encoding (
54673 Unicode (utf8) [default]
54679 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
54680 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
54685 \begin_layout Description
54687 \begin_inset space ~
54695 \begin_inset space ~
54698 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
54705 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54709 which use Unicode directly,
54710 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54717 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54718 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54720 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
54723 \begin_layout Description
54725 \begin_inset space ~
54729 \begin_inset space ~
54732 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54738 \begin_inset Index idx
54743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54746 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54761 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
54767 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
54769 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
54770 This used to be more comprehensive than
54773 \begin_inset space ~
54779 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
54784 \begin_layout Description
54786 \begin_inset space ~
54789 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54795 \begin_inset Index idx
54800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54803 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54819 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
54820 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
54821 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
54822 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
54823 with the default encoding (
54825 Unicode (utf8) [default]
54831 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
54832 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
54837 \begin_layout Description
54839 \begin_inset space ~
54843 \begin_inset space ~
54847 \begin_inset space ~
54850 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
54851 \begin_inset space ~
54857 \begin_layout Description
54859 \begin_inset space ~
54863 \begin_inset space ~
54867 \begin_inset space ~
54870 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
54885 Spanish and Swedish;
54886 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
54889 \begin_layout Description
54891 \begin_inset space ~
54895 \begin_inset space ~
54899 \begin_inset space ~
54902 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
54903 but with the Euro currency sign,
54904 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
54907 \begin_layout Section
54909 \begin_inset Index idx
54914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54916 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54931 \begin_inset Index idx
54936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54938 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54953 \begin_inset Index idx
54958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54960 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54975 \begin_inset Index idx
54980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54982 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54999 \begin_layout Standard
55000 Here you can alter the font color for the
55009 \begin_inset space ~
55015 light grey)for the background color for the
55023 \begin_inset space ~
55034 sets the color back to the default.
55037 \begin_layout Standard
55038 Clicking any button showing
55046 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
55047 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
55050 \begin_layout Standard
55055 \begin_inset space ~
55060 font color and use the option
55063 \begin_inset space ~
55068 in the document settings under
55071 \begin_inset space ~
55077 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
55078 \begin_inset space ~
55082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55084 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
55092 \begin_layout Standard
55093 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
55099 \begin_layout Standard
55103 \begin_inset space ~
55112 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
55114 \begin_inset space ~
55117 Code after a forced page break:
55120 \begin_layout Itemize
55121 For the page color:
55122 \begin_inset Newline newline
55129 pagecolor{color name}
55132 \begin_layout Itemize
55133 For the text color:
55134 \begin_inset Newline newline
55144 \begin_layout Standard
55145 You are restricted to one of
55187 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
55194 \begin_inset space ~
55200 \begin_inset Newline newline
55203 If you have changed a text or background color,
55204 you can use the following names to refer to them:
55207 \begin_layout Itemize
55213 \begin_inset Newline newline
55218 page_backgroundcolor
55221 \begin_layout Itemize
55225 \begin_inset space ~
55231 \begin_inset Newline newline
55239 \begin_layout Itemize
55243 \begin_inset space ~
55249 \begin_inset Newline newline
55257 \begin_layout Itemize
55261 \begin_inset space ~
55267 \begin_inset Newline newline
55275 \begin_layout Standard
55276 To see how to define and use custom colors,
55280 \begin_inset space ~
55288 \begin_inset space ~
55296 \begin_layout Section
55298 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
55302 \begin_layout Standard
55304 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
55305 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
55306 \begin_inset space ~
55310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55312 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
55321 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
55322 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
55325 \begin_layout Standard
55327 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
55330 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
55333 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
55335 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
55336 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
55337 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
55340 \begin_layout Section
55344 \begin_layout Standard
55345 Here you can adjust the
55349 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
55353 as described in section
55354 \begin_inset space ~
55358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55360 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
55366 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
55370 \begin_layout Standard
55372 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
55373 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
55374 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
55375 The most common one are:
55378 \begin_layout Description
55380 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
55381 right Line numbers to the right margin
55384 \begin_layout Description
55386 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
55387 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
55391 \begin_layout Description
55393 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
55394 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
55397 \begin_layout Description
55399 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
55400 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
55403 \begin_layout Description
55405 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
55406 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
55409 \begin_layout Description
55411 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
55413 \begin_inset space ~
55416 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
55421 \begin_layout Section
55425 \begin_layout Standard
55426 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55432 \begin_inset Index idx
55437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55440 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55460 \begin_inset Index idx
55465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55468 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55487 \begin_inset Index idx
55492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55495 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55510 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55514 Sectioned bibliography
55516 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55522 \begin_inset Index idx
55527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55530 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55550 you can select the style files and specify further options.
55552 you can select a document-specific
55556 for the generation of the bibliography.
55557 For a further description of these possibilities see section
55558 \begin_inset space ~
55562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55564 reference "sec:Bibliography"
55572 \begin_layout Section
55576 \begin_layout Standard
55577 Here you can define the
55581 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
55582 \begin_inset space ~
55586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55588 reference "sec:Index"
55596 \begin_layout Section
55600 \begin_layout Standard
55601 The PDF properties are explained in section
55602 \begin_inset space ~
55606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55608 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
55616 \begin_layout Section
55620 \begin_layout Standard
55621 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
55622 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55628 \begin_inset Index idx
55633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55656 \begin_inset Index idx
55661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55664 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55684 \begin_inset Index idx
55689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55692 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55712 \begin_inset Index idx
55717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55740 \begin_inset Index idx
55745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55748 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55768 \begin_inset Index idx
55773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55776 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55796 \begin_inset Index idx
55801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55824 \begin_inset Index idx
55829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55832 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55852 \begin_inset Index idx
55857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55860 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55879 \begin_inset Index idx
55884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55887 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55902 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
55905 \begin_layout Description
55906 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
55907 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
55908 -errors in formulas,
55909 ensure that you have this enabled.
55912 \begin_layout Description
55913 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
55914 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
55915 -errors in formulas,
55916 ensure that you have this enabled.
55919 \begin_layout Description
55920 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
55924 \begin_inset space ~
55936 \begin_layout Description
55937 esint is used for special integral characters,
55941 \begin_inset space ~
55953 \begin_layout Description
55954 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
55966 \begin_layout Description
55967 mathtools is used for the math commands
56008 and labeled arrows,
56009 see the corresponding sections in the
56016 \begin_layout Description
56017 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
56020 Chemical Symbols and Equations
56029 \begin_layout Description
56030 stackrel is used for the math command
56048 \begin_layout Description
56049 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
56052 \begin_layout Description
56053 undertilde is used for the math command
56062 Accents for one Character
56071 \begin_layout Section
56073 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
56075 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
56081 \begin_layout Standard
56083 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
56084 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
56087 \begin_layout Standard
56089 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
56090 The float placement options
56091 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
56094 are described in the section
56097 \begin_inset space ~
56101 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
56103 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
56111 \begin_inset space ~
56119 \begin_layout Section
56123 \begin_layout Standard
56124 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
56126 Program Code Listings
56131 \begin_inset space ~
56139 \begin_layout Section
56143 \begin_layout Standard
56144 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
56153 set to be used and set the
56158 The itemize environment is described in section
56159 \begin_inset space ~
56163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56165 reference "sec:Itemize"
56173 \begin_layout Standard
56174 You can furthermore specify a
56177 \begin_inset space ~
56182 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56183 command of the desired character.
56184 For example to use the € sign,
56185 you have to insert the command
56192 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
56194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56198 \begin_inset space \space{}
56202 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
56212 To find the command for a math symbol,
56213 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
56216 \begin_layout Standard
56217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56226 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
56227 -packages in the preamble (menu
56229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
56230 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
56233 \begin_inset space ~
56239 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
56243 usepackage{textcomp}
56246 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
56250 usepackage{amssymb}
56260 \begin_layout Section
56264 \begin_layout Standard
56265 Branches are described in section
56266 \begin_inset space ~
56270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56272 reference "sec:Branches"
56280 \begin_layout Section
56282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56284 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
56291 \begin_layout Standard
56292 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
56295 \begin_layout Description
56297 \begin_inset space ~
56301 \begin_inset space ~
56305 The format that is used when you enter
56306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56327 View Master Document
56328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56335 Update Master Document
56336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56343 menu or the toolbar.
56344 The default is set in
56346 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
56347 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
56349 \begin_inset space ~
56352 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
56357 \begin_inset space ~
56361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56363 reference "sec:File-Formats"
56371 \begin_layout Description
56373 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
56375 \begin_inset space ~
56379 \begin_inset space ~
56383 \begin_inset space ~
56386 programs If this is switched on,
56392 option which is needed with some packages.
56393 Note that this comes with security risks,
56394 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
56397 \begin_layout Description
56399 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
56401 \begin_inset space ~
56405 \begin_inset space ~
56408 Options offers settings for the
56416 \begin_layout Itemize
56420 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
56422 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
56424 \begin_inset space ~
56430 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
56432 \begin_inset space ~
56436 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
56442 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
56444 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
56445 settings for the menu
56447 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
56451 \begin_inset space ~
56455 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
56458 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
56459 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
56464 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
56466 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
56468 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
56471 or a detailed description see section
56473 Reverse DVI/PDF search
56478 \begin_inset space ~
56484 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
56488 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
56492 \begin_layout Itemize
56494 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
56497 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
56499 determines whether so-called
56500 \begin_inset Quotes els
56504 \begin_inset Quotes ers
56508 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
56509 \begin_inset Quotes els
56513 \begin_inset Quotes ers
56516 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
56517 (such as sections or captions),
56518 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
56520 This setting is on by default,
56521 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
56523 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
56524 you can uncheck this.
56525 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
56527 just leave it checked.
56533 \begin_layout Description
56535 \begin_inset space ~
56539 \begin_inset space ~
56542 Options offers settings for the export format
56550 \begin_inset space ~
56555 will assure that the output follows exactly version
56556 \begin_inset space ~
56559 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
56563 \begin_inset space ~
56568 settings are described in detail in section
56570 Math Output in XHTML
56575 \begin_inset space ~
56584 \begin_inset space ~
56588 \begin_inset space ~
56593 is used for the size of equations in the output.
56596 \begin_layout Description
56598 \begin_inset space ~
56603 Save transient properties
56605 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
56606 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
56610 \begin_layout Itemize
56611 the activation of change tracking
56614 \begin_layout Itemize
56615 the output of tracked changes
56618 \begin_layout Itemize
56619 the recording of the document directory path.
56622 \begin_layout Standard
56623 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
56627 \begin_layout Section
56635 \begin_layout Standard
56636 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
56637 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
56639 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
56641 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
56644 \begin_layout Standard
56645 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56646 -syntax is given in section
56647 \begin_inset space ~
56651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56653 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
56661 \begin_layout Chapter
56667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56669 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
56674 \begin_inset Index idx
56679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56688 \begin_layout Standard
56689 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
56691 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
56695 It has the following submenus.
56698 \begin_layout Section
56702 \begin_layout Subsection
56706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56707 User Interface File
56708 \begin_inset Index idx
56713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56715 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56730 \begin_inset Index idx
56735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56737 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56754 \begin_layout Standard
56755 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
56756 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
56764 \begin_layout Description
56769 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
56772 \begin_layout Description
56779 the menu entries in popup context menus
56782 \begin_layout Description
56787 specifies the toolbar buttons
56790 \begin_layout Standard
56791 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
56792 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
56795 \begin_layout Standard
56796 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
56810 entries must be finished with an explicit
56840 and in the case of the
56841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56853 The syntax for the entries is:
56856 \begin_layout Standard
56857 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
56863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56886 \begin_layout Standard
56888 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
56891 All the \SpecialChar LyX
56892 -functions are listed in the menu
56894 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
56896 \begin_inset space ~
56904 \begin_layout Standard
56905 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
56911 \begin_layout Standard
56913 assuming you use the menu
56915 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
56918 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
56919 you can add the line
56922 \begin_layout Standard
56923 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
56929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56947 \begin_layout Standard
56949 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
56953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56964 to have the sixth bookmark.
56967 \begin_layout Standard
56971 \begin_inset space ~
56976 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
56977 's toolbar buttons.
56978 The currently available icon sets are compared in
56979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56982 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
56990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56994 \begin_layout Standard
56997 Enable tool tips in main work area
56999 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
57002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57006 \begin_layout Standard
57011 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
57012 should display in the menu
57014 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
57016 \begin_inset space ~
57024 \begin_layout Subsection
57028 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57032 \begin_layout Standard
57035 Restore window layouts and geometries
57038 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
57042 \begin_layout Standard
57045 Restore cursor positions
57047 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
57050 \begin_layout Standard
57053 Load opened files from last session
57055 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
57059 \begin_layout Standard
57062 Clear all session information
57064 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
57065 sessions (cursor positions,
57066 names of last opened documents,
57070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57074 name "subsec:Backup documents"
57079 \begin_inset Index idx
57084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57086 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57103 \begin_layout Standard
57106 Backup original documents when saving
57108 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when it was saved the last time.
57109 It is stored in the
57112 \begin_inset space ~
57118 \begin_inset space ~
57122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57124 reference "sec:Paths"
57129 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
57132 \begin_inset space ~
57138 The backup file has the file extension
57139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57153 \begin_layout Standard
57160 you can specify the time between backup saves.
57163 \begin_layout Standard
57166 Save documents compressed by default
57168 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
57169 \begin_inset space ~
57173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57175 reference "subsec:Compressed"
57181 This applies to newly created documents only.
57182 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
57185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57186 Windows & work area
57189 \begin_layout Standard
57192 Open documents in tabs
57195 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
57199 \begin_layout Standard
57204 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
57209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57211 \begin_inset space ~
57215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57217 reference "sec:Paths"
57222 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
57231 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
57233 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
57234 instance is created for each file.
57237 \begin_layout Standard
57240 Single close-tab button
57243 there will only be one close button (
57253 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
57254 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
57255 Regardless of this option,
57256 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
57259 \begin_layout Standard
57260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57269 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
57270 before the change takes effect.
57278 \begin_layout Standard
57283 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
57284 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
57286 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
57290 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
57291 and only want to close the view in once instance.
57294 \begin_layout Subsection
57296 \begin_inset Index idx
57301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57303 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57320 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
57327 \begin_layout Standard
57328 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
57332 \begin_layout Standard
57333 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57342 This section only deals with the fonts
57346 the \SpecialChar LyX
57348 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
57349 and set in the menu
57351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57363 \begin_layout Standard
57383 (depends on the system) as its
57386 \begin_inset space ~
57402 \begin_layout Standard
57403 You can change the font size with the
57410 \begin_layout Standard
57415 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
57417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57420 points have the size of 1
57421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57426 \begin_inset space ~
57430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57432 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
57438 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
57439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57443 The sizes are explained in detail in section
57444 \begin_inset space ~
57448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57450 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
57458 \begin_layout Subsection
57460 \begin_inset Index idx
57465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57467 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57483 \begin_inset Index idx
57488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57490 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57507 \begin_layout Standard
57508 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
57509 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
57516 \begin_layout Standard
57517 By checking the option
57521 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
57529 \begin_inset space ~
57533 \begin_inset space ~
57538 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
57541 \begin_layout Subsection
57543 \begin_inset Index idx
57548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57567 \begin_layout Standard
57568 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
57572 \begin_layout Standard
57577 enables previewing snippets of your document.
57578 This feature is described in section
57579 \begin_inset space ~
57583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57585 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
57593 \begin_layout Standard
57594 Checking the option
57597 \begin_inset space ~
57601 \begin_inset space ~
57605 \begin_inset space ~
57610 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
57613 \begin_layout Section
57615 \begin_inset Index idx
57620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57639 \begin_layout Subsection
57643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57647 \begin_layout Standard
57650 Cursor follows scrollbar
57652 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
57655 \begin_layout Standard
57656 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
57657 If you set the value to zero,
57658 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
57661 \begin_layout Standard
57664 Scroll below end of document
57666 is self-explanatory.
57669 \begin_layout Standard
57670 In \SpecialChar LyX
57671 one can jump from word to word by pressing
57678 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
57680 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
57681 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
57682 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
57686 \begin_layout Standard
57688 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
57691 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
57693 is only relevant in documents that
57699 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
57707 markup) with this option selected.
57708 It the option is not selected,
57709 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
57710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57715 \begin_inset Quotes els
57719 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57723 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
57724 dissolving from insets.
57735 \begin_inset Quotes els
57739 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57742 notwithstanding the state of this option.
57747 \begin_layout Standard
57750 Sort environments alphabetically
57752 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
57755 \begin_layout Standard
57758 Group environments by their category
57760 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
57763 \begin_layout Standard
57768 options determine the editing style for math macros,
57778 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
57782 \begin_layout Standard
57784 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
57787 Search drive for cited files
57789 allows \SpecialChar LyX
57790 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
57793 \begin_inset space ~
57797 \begin_inset space ~
57801 \begin_inset space ~
57805 \begin_inset space ~
57808 Content\SpecialChar ldots
57811 context menu on a citation.
57815 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
57817 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
57820 field determines the search pattern.
57822 \begin_inset space ~
57826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57828 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
57838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57842 \begin_layout Standard
57843 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
57848 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
57849 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
57850 the text then appears centered.
57853 \begin_layout Subsection
57855 \begin_inset Index idx
57860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57867 \begin_inset Index idx
57872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57874 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57891 \begin_layout Standard
57896 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
57898 Several binding files are available,
57902 \begin_layout Description
57903 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
57906 \begin_layout Description
57907 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
57918 \begin_layout Description
57919 mac.bind a set of bindings for
57922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57930 \begin_layout Standard
57931 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
57937 and binding files for special languages.
57938 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
57940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57944 \begin_inset space \space{}
57948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57956 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
57957 in a certain language,
57959 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
57962 \begin_layout Standard
57963 Some binding files,
57969 only have a limited scope.
57970 When looking at the end of the file
57975 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
57978 \begin_layout Standard
57982 \begin_inset space ~
57986 \begin_inset space ~
57991 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
57994 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57998 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
58003 \begin_inset Index idx
58008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58010 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58027 \begin_layout Standard
58028 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
58029 functions and the bound shortcuts.
58030 To find functions easily,
58031 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
58033 Show key-bindings containing
58036 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
58037 Insert there for example as keyword
58038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58045 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
58046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58055 one function can have more than one shortcut.
58056 All \SpecialChar LyX
58057 functions are also listed in the file
58062 that you will find in the
58069 \begin_layout Standard
58071 to add the shortcut
58080 select the function and press the
58085 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
58086 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
58089 \begin_layout Standard
58090 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
58091 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
58092 Function definition with “
58095 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
58097 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
58102 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
58104 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
58107 \begin_layout Standard
58108 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
58112 \begin_layout Standard
58113 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
58114 The syntax of the entries is:
58117 \begin_layout Standard
58123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58142 \begin_layout Standard
58145 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
58146 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
58147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58180 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
58181 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
58182 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
58183 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
58188 you needed to specify it as
58193 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
58194 you don't have to care for these specifics.
58196 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
58199 \begin_layout Subsection
58201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58203 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
58208 \begin_inset Index idx
58213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58220 \begin_inset Index idx
58225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58227 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58244 \begin_layout Standard
58245 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
58246 For the case where this is not possible,
58248 provides keyboard maps.
58251 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
58255 \begin_inset space ~
58259 \begin_inset space ~
58264 and select the keyboard map file named
58271 \begin_layout Standard
58286 you can select the first and second with
58289 arg "keymap-primary"
58295 arg "keymap-secondary"
58298 respectively or toggle between them with
58301 arg "keymap-toggle"
58307 \begin_layout Standard
58308 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58317 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
58325 \begin_layout Standard
58326 You can also specify the mouse
58328 Wheel scrolling speed
58331 The standard value is 1.0;
58332 higher values speed up the scrolling,
58333 lower ones slow it down.
58336 Middle mouse button pasting
58338 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
58341 \begin_layout Standard
58349 \begin_inset space ~
58353 \begin_inset space ~
58359 you can select a key for zooming.
58360 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
58361 the text is zoomed.
58364 \begin_layout Subsection
58368 \begin_layout Standard
58369 Input completion is described in section
58370 \begin_inset space ~
58374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58376 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
58384 \begin_layout Section
58386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58393 \begin_inset Index idx
58398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58405 \begin_inset Index idx
58410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58412 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58429 \begin_layout Standard
58430 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
58431 are normally determined during the installation.
58432 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
58435 \begin_layout Description
58437 \begin_inset space ~
58440 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
58441 's working directory.
58442 It is the default when you
58454 \begin_inset space ~
58462 \begin_layout Description
58464 \begin_inset space ~
58467 templates This directory
58468 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
58469 contains the templates that are shown
58470 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
58471 will be opened when you use the menu
58472 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
58477 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58479 \begin_inset space ~
58483 \begin_inset space ~
58491 \begin_layout Description
58493 \begin_inset space ~
58496 files This directory
58497 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
58498 will be opened when you use the
58499 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
58500 contains the example files that are listed in
58503 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
58512 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58514 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
58516 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
58522 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
58524 \begin_inset Newline newline
58528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58541 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
58542 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
58552 \begin_layout Description
58554 \begin_inset space ~
58558 \begin_inset Index idx
58563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58565 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58579 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
58580 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
58581 \begin_inset space ~
58585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58587 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
58597 will be used to save the backups.
58598 \begin_inset Newline newline
58601 Backup files have the ending
58602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58612 \begin_layout Description
58614 \begin_inset space ~
58617 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
58618 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
58620 \begin_inset Newline newline
58628 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58634 You can edit this file with the program
58643 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
58644 in its preferences under
58647 \begin_inset space ~
58653 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
58658 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
58660 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
58667 and \SpecialChar LyX
58668 need to be running the same time.
58669 \begin_inset Newline newline
58672 The pipe is also used for the
58678 \begin_inset space ~
58682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58684 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
58690 \begin_inset Newline newline
58693 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
58694 Server-Pipe on Windows,
58695 you must use this pipe name:
58696 \begin_inset Newline newline
58712 \begin_layout Description
58714 \begin_inset space ~
58717 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
58720 \begin_layout Description
58722 \begin_inset space ~
58725 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
58726 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
58729 \begin_layout Description
58731 \begin_inset space ~
58734 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
58739 You only need to specify it if you are using
58743 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
58744 For \SpecialChar LyX
58749 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
58752 \begin_layout Description
58754 \begin_inset space ~
58757 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
58758 When \SpecialChar LyX
58759 needs to use an external program,
58760 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
58761 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
58763 so you normally don't have to modify it.
58765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58773 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
58776 \begin_layout Description
58778 \begin_inset space ~
58781 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
58782 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
58783 code or in the document preamble.
58784 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
58785 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
58786 If files are included,
58787 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
58788 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
58790 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
58791 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
58794 \begin_layout Section
58798 \begin_layout Standard
58799 Here you can insert your
58808 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
58809 as described in section
58810 \begin_inset space ~
58814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58816 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
58822 to mark changes you make as yours.
58825 \begin_layout Section
58827 \begin_inset Index idx
58832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58834 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58849 \begin_inset Index idx
58854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58873 \begin_layout Subsection
58875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58877 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
58884 \begin_layout Description
58886 \begin_inset space ~
58890 \begin_inset space ~
58893 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
58895 You can find its actual translation status here:
58897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58899 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
58905 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
58909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58911 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
58912 LaTeX Language Support
58917 \begin_layout Description
58919 \begin_inset space ~
58922 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
58923 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
58924 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
58925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58941 The most widespread language package is
58946 \begin_inset Index idx
58951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58954 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58969 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
58971 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
58972 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
58973 come with the alternative language package
58978 \begin_inset Index idx
58983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58986 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59000 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
59002 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
59007 The available selections are described in section
59008 \begin_inset space ~
59012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59014 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
59022 \begin_layout Description
59024 \begin_inset space ~
59028 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
59029 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
59030 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
59032 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
59036 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
59040 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
59042 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
59046 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
59047 that is used to switch to a different language
59048 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
59049 to start the package
59053 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
59054 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
59058 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
59059 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
59062 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
59066 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
59075 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
59083 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
59086 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
59088 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
59093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
59111 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59112 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
59120 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59125 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
59131 this setting is ignored.
59136 \begin_layout Description
59138 \begin_inset space ~
59142 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
59149 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
59150 Use this if the language switch set in
59154 needs to be explicitly ended,
59159 's alternative command
59163 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
59164 \SpecialChar allowbreak
59167 end{otherlanguage*}
59171 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
59174 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
59175 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
59181 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59183 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
59187 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59193 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
59199 this setting is ignored.
59204 \begin_layout Description
59206 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
59208 \begin_inset space ~
59212 \begin_inset space ~
59215 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
59218 \begin_layout Description
59220 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
59222 \begin_inset space ~
59226 \begin_inset space ~
59229 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
59235 \begin_layout Description
59237 \begin_inset space ~
59241 \begin_inset space ~
59245 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
59247 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
59250 this option is set,
59251 the languages used in the document will be added
59252 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
59255 to the document class options
59256 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
59257 rather than the language package options.
59258 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
59263 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
59264 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
59266 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
59267 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
59269 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
59273 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
59274 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
59283 \begin_layout Description
59285 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
59287 \begin_inset space ~
59291 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
59293 \begin_inset space ~
59297 \begin_inset space ~
59301 \begin_inset space ~
59307 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
59309 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
59312 this option is set,
59314 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
59315 the language switch defined in
59318 \begin_inset space ~
59323 is output at the beginning of the document,
59324 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
59325 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
59326 This might be needed if you use a non-default
59329 \begin_inset space ~
59334 or if a package resets the document language.
59336 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
59337 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
59338 documents start with the chosen document language.
59339 When this option is not set,
59343 \begin_inset space ~
59348 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59350 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
59353 \begin_inset space ~
59363 \begin_layout Description
59365 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
59367 \begin_inset space ~
59371 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
59373 \begin_inset space ~
59377 \begin_inset space ~
59381 \begin_inset space ~
59387 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
59391 \begin_inset space ~
59395 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
59396 Set document language explicitly
59402 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
59404 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
59411 \begin_inset space ~
59417 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
59419 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
59423 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
59425 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
59428 the end of the document.
59429 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
59433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59434 \paragraph_spacing single
59436 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
59442 \begin_layout Description
59444 \begin_inset space ~
59448 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
59450 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
59454 \begin_inset space ~
59458 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
59461 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
59463 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
59467 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
59470 in a language different
59471 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
59473 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
59476 the document language will be
59477 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
59478 marked (by default with a blue
59481 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
59483 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
59487 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
59491 \begin_layout Description
59493 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
59495 \begin_inset space ~
59499 \begin_inset space ~
59503 \begin_inset space ~
59508 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
59509 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
59510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59514 English and Hebrew:
59516 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
59522 \begin_layout Description
59524 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
59526 \begin_inset space ~
59530 \begin_inset space ~
59533 support Enables the use of languages,
59534 written from right to left (RTL),
59541 \begin_layout Description
59543 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
59545 \begin_inset space ~
59549 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
59551 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
59555 \begin_inset space ~
59559 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
59560 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
59561 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
59563 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
59567 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
59569 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
59570 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
59574 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
59576 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
59580 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
59585 \begin_layout Standard
59590 means that the cursor
59591 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
59592 follows the logic of the text direction,
59593 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
59595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59599 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
59600 Hebrew embedded in English),
59601 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
59606 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
59607 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
59608 right arrow in this specific case always means:
59613 in text (even if this means:
59620 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
59621 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
59622 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
59623 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
59624 since the cursor then follows a coherent
59625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59636 \begin_layout Standard
59638 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
59644 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
59646 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
59647 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
59652 ) when coming from the left.
59653 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
59654 at the expense of the text logic.
59655 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
59656 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
59657 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
59662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59664 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
59668 \begin_layout Description
59670 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
59672 \begin_inset space ~
59676 \begin_inset space ~
59679 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
59681 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
59682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59688 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
59691 \begin_layout Description
59693 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
59695 \begin_inset space ~
59699 \begin_inset space ~
59702 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
59708 \begin_layout Subsection
59712 \begin_layout Standard
59713 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
59714 \begin_inset space ~
59718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59720 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
59728 \begin_layout Section
59732 \begin_layout Subsection
59734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59736 name "subsec:General-output"
59743 \begin_layout Description
59745 \begin_inset space ~
59748 search Commands that will be used for the menu
59750 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
59752 \begin_inset space ~
59758 For a detailed description see section
59760 Reverse DVI/PDF search
59765 \begin_inset space ~
59773 \begin_layout Description
59775 \begin_inset space ~
59778 Options Options for the program
59782 that is used for the export format
59788 \begin_inset space ~
59792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59794 reference "subsec:Export"
59800 Possible options are listed in the
59805 \begin_inset Newline newline
59809 \begin_inset Flex URL
59812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59814 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
59824 \begin_layout Description
59826 \begin_inset space ~
59830 \begin_inset space ~
59833 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
59835 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59836 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
59838 \begin_inset space ~
59844 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
59847 \begin_layout Description
59849 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
59851 \begin_inset space ~
59855 \begin_inset Index idx
59860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59867 \begin_inset Index idx
59872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59874 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59888 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
59889 \begin_inset Newline newline
59893 \begin_inset Flex URL
59896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59898 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
59904 \begin_inset Newline newline
59907 For example the format
59908 \begin_inset Newline newline
59912 \begin_inset Newline newline
59915 prints the date as day/month/year.
59920 \begin_layout Description
59922 \begin_inset space ~
59926 \begin_inset space ~
59929 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
59930 is allowed to overwrite on export.
59933 \begin_layout Subsection
59939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59941 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
59946 \begin_inset Index idx
59951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59953 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59971 \begin_layout Description
59973 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
59975 \begin_inset space ~
59983 \begin_inset space ~
59987 \begin_inset space ~
59990 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
59995 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
60019 are used for Cyrillic.
60020 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
60022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60035 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
60036 sets up in the background.
60037 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
60042 \begin_layout Description
60044 \begin_inset space ~
60048 \begin_inset space ~
60052 \begin_inset space ~
60056 \begin_inset space ~
60059 options They only have an effect when the program
60063 is used as DVI-viewer,
60064 read its manual to find out more.
60067 \begin_layout Standard
60068 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
60069 But before you change something,
60070 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
60073 \begin_layout Description
60075 \begin_inset space ~
60078 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
60080 \begin_inset space ~
60084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60086 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
60094 \begin_layout Description
60096 \begin_inset space ~
60099 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
60101 \begin_inset space ~
60105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60107 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
60115 \begin_layout Description
60117 \begin_inset space ~
60120 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
60122 \begin_inset space ~
60126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60128 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
60136 \begin_layout Description
60142 \begin_inset space ~
60145 command Command for the program
60147 Check\SpecialChar TeX
60150 that is described in the section
60152 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
60157 Additional Features
60162 \begin_layout Standard
60163 There are additionally the following options:
60166 \begin_layout Description
60168 \begin_inset space ~
60172 \begin_inset space ~
60176 \begin_inset space ~
60180 \begin_inset space ~
60185 \begin_inset space ~
60188 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
60190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60207 to separate folders.
60208 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
60210 \begin_inset Index idx
60215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60222 \begin_inset Index idx
60227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60229 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60246 \begin_layout Description
60248 \begin_inset space ~
60252 \begin_inset space ~
60256 \begin_inset space ~
60260 \begin_inset space ~
60264 \begin_inset space ~
60268 \begin_inset space ~
60271 changes Removes all manually set
60277 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
60278 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
60280 \begin_inset space ~
60285 dialog when changing the document class.
60288 \begin_layout Section
60290 \begin_inset space ~
60294 \begin_inset Index idx
60299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60308 \begin_layout Subsection
60310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60312 name "subsec:Converters"
60317 \begin_inset Index idx
60322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60331 \begin_layout Standard
60332 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
60333 You can modify converters or create new ones.
60334 To modify a converter,
60336 change the entry of the
60343 \begin_inset space ~
60348 field and press the
60353 To create a new converter,
60354 select an existing one,
60355 select a different format in the
60358 \begin_inset space ~
60368 field and press the
60375 \begin_layout Standard
60378 Converter File Cache
60385 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
60387 Maximum Age (in days
60390 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
60391 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
60394 \begin_layout Standard
60395 More about converters,
60396 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
60397 is described in the section
60408 \begin_layout Subsection
60410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60412 name "sec:File-Formats"
60417 \begin_inset Index idx
60422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60429 \begin_inset Index idx
60434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60443 \begin_layout Standard
60444 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
60454 programs that should be used for certain formats.
60457 \begin_layout Standard
60458 You can also define the
60460 Default output format
60462 that is used when you use
60466 View Master Document
60470 Update Master Document
60476 menu or the toolbar.
60479 \begin_layout Standard
60480 More about formats and their options is described in the section
60491 \begin_layout Standard
60492 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
60493 's temporary directory,
60494 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
60495 This is done by specifying a
60500 More about this is described in the section
60511 \begin_layout Chapter
60512 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
60514 \begin_inset Index idx
60519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60528 name "chap:Units-available-in"
60535 \begin_layout Standard
60537 \begin_inset space ~
60541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60543 reference "tab:Units"
60548 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
60549 and used in this documentation.
60552 \begin_layout Standard
60553 \begin_inset Float table
60560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60561 \begin_inset Caption Standard
60563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60579 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
60585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60587 \begin_inset Tabular
60588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
60589 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
60590 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
60591 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
60592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
60594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60745 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
60749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
60978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
60995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61016 scaled point (65536
61017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61084 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
61089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61208 % of original image width
61213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61297 \begin_layout Standard
61298 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
61301 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
61308 \begin_layout Bibliography
61309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61310 LatexCommand bibitem
61317 The \SpecialChar LyX
61320 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61323 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
61329 \begin_inset Newline newline
61333 \begin_inset Flex URL
61336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61338 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
61346 \begin_layout Bibliography
61347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61348 LatexCommand bibitem
61349 key "latexcompanion"
61354 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
61357 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
61358 Companion Second Edition.
61365 \begin_layout Bibliography
61366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61367 LatexCommand bibitem
61373 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
61377 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
61385 \begin_layout Bibliography
61386 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61387 LatexCommand bibitem
61398 A Document Preparation System.
61406 \begin_layout Bibliography
61407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61408 LatexCommand bibitem
61418 The \SpecialChar TeX
61426 \begin_layout Bibliography
61427 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61428 LatexCommand bibitem
61434 The \SpecialChar TeX
61436 \begin_inset Newline newline
61440 \begin_inset Flex URL
61443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61445 https://ctan.org/topic
61453 \begin_layout Bibliography
61454 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61455 LatexCommand bibitem
61461 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
61463 \begin_inset Newline newline
61467 \begin_inset Flex URL
61470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61472 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
61480 \begin_layout Bibliography
61481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61482 LatexCommand bibitem
61489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61491 name "Documentation"
61492 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
61499 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
61503 \begin_inset Newline newline
61507 \begin_inset Flex URL
61510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61512 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
61520 \begin_layout Bibliography
61521 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61522 LatexCommand bibitem
61529 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61531 name "Documentation"
61532 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
61537 how to use the program
61539 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
61543 \begin_inset Newline newline
61547 \begin_inset Flex URL
61550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61552 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
61560 \begin_layout Bibliography
61561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61562 LatexCommand bibitem
61569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61571 name "Documentation"
61572 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
61577 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61583 \begin_inset Index idx
61588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61606 \begin_inset Newline newline
61610 \begin_inset Flex URL
61613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61615 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
61623 \begin_layout Bibliography
61624 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61625 LatexCommand bibitem
61632 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61634 name "Documentation"
61635 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
61640 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61646 \begin_inset Index idx
61651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61654 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61669 \begin_inset Newline newline
61673 \begin_inset Flex URL
61676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61678 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
61686 \begin_layout Bibliography
61687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61688 LatexCommand bibitem
61695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61697 name "Documentation"
61698 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
61708 \begin_inset Newline newline
61712 \begin_inset Flex URL
61715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61717 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
61725 \begin_layout Bibliography
61726 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61727 LatexCommand bibitem
61728 key "makeindex-man"
61734 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61737 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
61747 \begin_inset Newline newline
61751 \begin_inset Flex URL
61754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61756 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
61762 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
61766 \begin_layout Bibliography
61768 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
61769 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61770 LatexCommand bibitem
61777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61779 name "Documentation"
61780 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
61790 \begin_inset Newline newline
61794 \begin_inset Flex URL
61797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61799 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
61801 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
61813 \begin_layout Bibliography
61814 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61815 LatexCommand bibitem
61822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61824 name "Documentation"
61825 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
61835 \begin_inset Newline newline
61839 \begin_inset Flex URL
61842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61844 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
61852 \begin_layout Bibliography
61853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61854 LatexCommand bibitem
61861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61863 name "Documentation"
61864 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
61869 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
61871 \begin_inset Newline newline
61875 \begin_inset Flex URL
61878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61880 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
61888 \begin_layout Bibliography
61889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61890 LatexCommand bibitem
61897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61899 name "Documentation"
61900 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
61905 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61911 \begin_inset Index idx
61916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61919 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61934 \begin_inset Newline newline
61938 \begin_inset Flex URL
61941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61943 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
61951 \begin_layout Bibliography
61952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
61953 LatexCommand bibitem
61960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
61962 name "Documentation"
61963 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
61968 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61974 \begin_inset Index idx
61979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61982 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61997 \begin_inset Newline newline
62001 \begin_inset Flex URL
62004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62006 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
62014 \begin_layout Bibliography
62015 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62016 LatexCommand bibitem
62023 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62025 name "Documentation"
62026 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
62031 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62037 \begin_inset Index idx
62042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62045 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62060 \begin_inset Newline newline
62064 \begin_inset Flex URL
62067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62069 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
62077 \begin_layout Bibliography
62078 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62079 LatexCommand bibitem
62086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62088 name "Documentation"
62089 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
62094 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62100 \begin_inset Index idx
62105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62123 \begin_inset Newline newline
62127 \begin_inset Flex URL
62130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62132 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
62140 \begin_layout Bibliography
62141 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62142 LatexCommand bibitem
62149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62151 name "Documentation"
62152 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
62157 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62163 \begin_inset Index idx
62168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62171 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62186 \begin_inset Newline newline
62190 \begin_inset Flex URL
62193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62195 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
62203 \begin_layout Bibliography
62204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62205 LatexCommand bibitem
62212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62214 name "Documentation"
62215 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
62220 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62226 \begin_inset Index idx
62231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62234 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62249 \begin_inset Newline newline
62253 \begin_inset Flex URL
62256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62258 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
62266 \begin_layout Bibliography
62267 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62268 LatexCommand bibitem
62275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62277 name "Documentation"
62278 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
62283 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62289 \begin_inset Index idx
62294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62297 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62312 \begin_inset Newline newline
62316 \begin_inset Flex URL
62319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62321 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
62329 \begin_layout Bibliography
62330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62331 LatexCommand bibitem
62338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62340 name "Documentation"
62341 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
62346 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62352 \begin_inset Index idx
62357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62360 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62375 \begin_inset Newline newline
62379 \begin_inset Flex URL
62382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62384 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
62392 \begin_layout Bibliography
62393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62394 LatexCommand bibitem
62401 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62404 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
62409 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
62411 \begin_inset Newline newline
62415 \begin_inset Flex URL
62418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62420 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
62428 \begin_layout Bibliography
62429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62430 LatexCommand bibitem
62437 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62440 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
62445 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
62447 \begin_inset Newline newline
62451 \begin_inset Flex URL
62454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62456 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
62464 \begin_layout Bibliography
62465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62466 LatexCommand bibitem
62473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62476 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
62481 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
62482 for Cyrillic languages:
62483 \begin_inset Newline newline
62487 \begin_inset Flex URL
62490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62492 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
62500 \begin_layout Bibliography
62501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62502 LatexCommand bibitem
62509 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62512 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
62517 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
62519 \begin_inset Newline newline
62523 \begin_inset Flex URL
62526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62528 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
62536 \begin_layout Bibliography
62537 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62538 LatexCommand bibitem
62545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62548 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
62553 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
62555 \begin_inset Newline newline
62559 \begin_inset Flex URL
62562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62564 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
62572 \begin_layout Bibliography
62573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62574 LatexCommand bibitem
62581 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62584 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
62589 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
62591 \begin_inset Newline newline
62595 \begin_inset Flex URL
62598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62600 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
62608 \begin_layout Standard
62609 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
62616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62644 \begin_inset Note Note
62647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62654 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
62655 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
62663 \begin_layout Standard
62664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
62665 LatexCommand bibtex
62666 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
62667 options "biblio/alphadin"
62674 \begin_layout Standard
62675 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62679 \begin_layout Standard
62683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62689 pagedeclaration}[1]{
62692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62699 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
62707 \begin_inset Note Note
62710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62711 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
62713 \begin_inset space ~
62717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
62719 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
62732 \begin_layout Standard
62733 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
62734 LatexCommand printnomenclature
62740 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
62741 LatexCommand printindex